Quarterlytics / Industrials / Marine Shipping / Genco Shipping & Trading Limited

Genco Shipping & Trading Limited

gnk · NYSE Industrials
Claim this profile
Ticker gnk
Exchange NYSE
Sector Industrials
Industry Marine Shipping
Employees 1037
← All annual reports
FY2013 Annual Report · Genco Shipping & Trading Limited
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
G

r

e

e

n

e

K

i

n

g

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

A

l

r

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

3

Time well spent

AnnuAl report 2013
Greene King plc

 
 
 
 
 
We are the country’s leading pub retailer 
and brewer, with an industry-leading range 
of pubs, restaurants and hotels and beer 
brands, and a long tradition dating back 
over 200 years.

We aim to be the best pubs 
and beer business in the UK 
by delivering outstanding 
value, exceptional service 
and unbeatable quality to 
our customers.

We have had another successful 
year, achieving record results, 
generating strong returns for 
our shareholders and making 
further strategic progress.

CHAIRMAN’S STATEMENT
page 5

CHIEF EXECUTIVE’S REVIEW
pages 10 and 11

VISIT THIS REPoRT oNLINE
greenekingreports.com/ar13

REVIEW OF THE YEAR
2  At a glance
4  Our performance highlights
5  Chairman’s statement
6  Our business
8  Our markets

BUSINESS REVIEW
10   Chief executive’s review
12   Our strategy
14   Operational review

14  Retail
19  Pub Partners
22  Brewing & Brands

25   Financial review

27   Key performance indicators

28   Risks and uncertainties
31   Corporate social responsibility

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
38   Board of directors
39   Senior management
40   Corporate governance statement
46   Directors’ remuneration report
55   Directors’ report
57   Directors’ responsibilities statements 

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
59   Independent auditor’s report (group)
60   Group income statement
61   Group statement of comprehensive income 
62   Group balance sheet
63   Group cash flow statement 
64   Group statement of changes in equity
65   Notes to the accounts 
96   Independent auditor’s report (company)
97   Company balance sheet 
98   Notes to the company accounts
102  Group financial record

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

1

 
 
 
 
REVIEW oF THE YEAR
At a glance 

We are the leading pub retailer and brewer in the UK, focused on 
delivering the best value, service and quality to all our customers.

Our business

Our strategy

Greene King is the leading pub retailer 
and brewer in the UK.

Our overall objective is to be considered 
the best pubs and beer business in the UK.

2,000+

We run 2,250 managed and 
tenanted pubs, restaurants 
and hotels

200+

We have been brewing 
award-winning ales for 
more than 200 years

Greene King is made up of three main businesses:

•	 Our Retail business comprises the pubs, restaurants 

and hotels that we manage across the UK.

•	 Our Pub Partners business offers people the 

opportunity to run their own pubs across the UK 
on a tenanted, leased or franchised basis.

•	 Our Brewing & Brands business operates breweries 

in Bury St Edmunds and in Dunbar. 

•	 We employ around 22,000 people across the UK, 

and we have 2,500 apprentices working at Greene King.

Our strategy to drive growth and returns 
to our shareholders has three main elements:

•	 Expand our biggest and fastest growing business, 
Retail, to 1,100 sites and at the same time increase 
the overall quality of the estate by increasing our 
exposure to long-term growth categories such as 
food, wine and coffee.

•	 Reduce the size of our tenanted estate to 1,200 while 
taking more control over the licensee offer and 
introducing innovative agreements into the estate.

•	 Deliver long-term market out-performance through 
industry-leading investment and innovation in our 
core ale brand portfolio.

•	 Operationally our strategy is to deliver outstanding 

value, exceptional service and unbeatable quality across 
all of our businesses.

 MoRE ABoUT oUR BUSINESS
pages 6 and 7

 MoRE ABoUT oUR STRATEGY
pages 12 and 13

2

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Our brands

Our markets

We have a number of well-known pub 
and restaurant brands and ales. 

We compete in the drinking out, eating 
out and staying out markets in the UK.

200+

There are now over 
200 Hungry Horse 
pub restaurants across 
the country

No.1

We brew the UK’s no. 1 
premium ale and Scotland’s 
leading ale brand 

Our range of pub, restaurant and ale brands 
includes the following:

•	 Popular national pub restaurant and restaurant 
brands such as Hungry Horse and Loch Fyne 
Restaurants.

•	 A range of historic coaching inns, elegant country 

houses and old timbered buildings which form part 
of our Old English Inns hotels.

•	 Well-known ale brands such as Greene King IPA, 

Old Speckled Hen and Abbot Ale, as well as 
Belhaven Best in Scotland.

•	 We also operate unbranded local pubs, ranging from 

sport led local pubs to those that offer a more premium 
pub dining experience.

In each market, we have again outperformed 
the overall market over the last 12 months:

•	 Food sales growth of 9.7% against the market up 1.6%.

•	 Drink sales growth of 6.7% against the market up 1.3%.

•	 Our accommodation business delivered RevPAR 
growth of 2.0% against the market down 0.5%.

•	 This has been achieved in another difficult trading 
environment, with consumer confidence low and 
volatile and limited or no real household disposable 
income growth.

•	 And although the government scrapped the beer duty 
escalator in the budget, the industry remains a heavily 
regulated one with the latest government consultation 
on the proposed statutory code for tenanted pub companies 
potentially bringing significant changes to the industry.

 oPERATIoNAL REVIEW
pages 14 to 24

MoRE ABoUT oUR MARKETS
pages 8 and 9

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

3

REVIEW oF THE YEAR
Our performance highlights 

Our team has once again delivered record results and attractive 
returns for our shareholders in a difficult environment.

Strong growth and record results

REVENUE
(£M)

oPERATING PRoFIT BEFoRE EXCEPTIoNALS
(£M)

PRoFIT BEFoRE TAX ANd EXCEPTIoNALS
(£M)

£1,194.7m +4.8% 

£248.2m +5.1% 

£162.0m +6.6% 

1,200.0

1,100.0

1,000.0

900.0

800.0

700.0

1
,
1
9
4
.
7

1
,
1
4
0
4

.

1
,
0
4
2
7

.

9
8
4
.
1

9
5
4
6

.

260.0

230.0

200.0

170.0

140.0

110.0

2
4
8
2

.

2
3
6
2

.

2
2
2
0

.

2
1
6
2

.

2
1
1
.
3

170.0

150.0

130.0

110.0

90.0

70.0

1
6
2
0

.

1
5
2
0

.

1
4
0
0

.

1
1
8
5

.

1
2
3
0

.

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

EBITdA**
(£M)

AdjUSTEd BASIC EARNINGS PER SHARE*†
(P)

AdjUSTEd dIVIdENd PER SHARE*†
(P)

£306.5m +5.0% 

57.0p +7.5% 

26.6p +7.3%

340.0

300.0

260.0

220.0

180.0

140.0

3
0
6
5

.

2
9
2
0

.

2
6
7
3

.

2
6
4
4

.

2
7
6
6

.

60.0

55.0

50.0

45.0

40.0

35.0

5
7
.
0

5
3
0

.

5
3
4

.

4
8
2

.

4
3
4

.

29.0

26.0

23.0

20.0

17.0

14.0

2
6
6

.

2
4
8

.

2
3
.
1

2
1
.
0

2
1
.
5

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

• Retail like-for-like sales up 2.3%; total Retail sales up 7.4%. 
• Retail operating profit up 12.1%; margin increased 80 basis points to 19.4%. 
• Average EBITDA per pub up 4.2% in Pub Partners; core like-for-like EBITDA up 0.1%.
• Brewing & Brands core own-brewed volume up 1.0%; revenue up 2.1%.
• Strong cash flow; earnings & dividend growth.
• Further improvement in ROCE, up 40 basis points to 8.9%.

FINANCIAL REVIEW
pages 25 to 27

* 

 As throughout, profit figures are shown before exceptional items.

**   EBITDA represents earnings before interest, tax, depreciation 

and exceptional items and is calculated as operating profit before 
exceptionals adjusted for the depreciation charge for the period.

†  Adjusted to reflect the bonus element of the 2009 rights issue.

4

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Chairman’s statement

ANOTHER 
SUCCESSFUL YEAR

“ On the back of our strong growth, 
we are recommending a final dividend 
of 19.45p per share, up 7.5%.”

Results
We have achieved another set of record 
results, despite the difficult weather 
conditions in the second half of the year. 
Revenue was £1,194.7m, up 4.8%, and 
operating profit before exceptionals was 
£248.2m, up 5.1%. Profit before tax and 
exceptional items was £162.0m, up 6.6%, 
while adjusted earnings per share was 
57.0p, up 7.5%.

Dividend
On the back of these record results and 
strong growth, the board has recommended 
a final dividend of 19.45p per share, up 7.5% 
on last year. This takes the total dividend 
for the year to 26.6p per share, up 7.3%. 
The final dividend is expected to be paid 
on 9 September 2013 to those shareholders 
on the register at the close of business 
on 9 August 2013.

Acquisitions
In the year, we have made further progress 
with the expansion of our Retail business. 
We spent £35.3m on 24 new pubs and have 
exchanged or completed on a further 30 sites 
for development.

Disposals
We also remain focused on disposing of sites 
that we consider no longer have a long-term 
sustainable future within our estate. 

These mainly come from Pub Partners, 
from which we disposed of 103 sites in the 
year. In total, the disposed properties 
raised proceeds of £28.0m.

a number of additional disclosures 
consistent with the government’s proposed 
new regulations on remuneration reporting. 
These regulations will apply to the company 
next year.

Board
At the end of December, we bade farewell 
to Norman Murray, who served on our board 
as a non-executive director for nine years, 
and acted as chairman of both the audit and 
the remuneration committees during that 
time. I would like to express my sincere 
thanks to him for the substantial contribution 
he made to the board and wish him well for 
the future. 

In October, we welcomed Lynne Weedall 
to our board as a non-executive director 
and member of the remuneration committee. 
She has subsequently become chairman of 
that committee. She is the HR and strategy 
director at Carphone Warehouse and we 
expect her business background to be a 
great asset to us.

Governance
The board continues to set itself high 
standards of corporate governance, 
supported by its nomination, remuneration 
and audit committees. The corporate 
governance section in this report shows 
details of our compliance with the UK 
Corporate Governance Code and our 
directors’ remuneration report incorporates 

People
Our consistent growth and success could 
not have been achieved without the hard 
work and efforts of our 22,000 employees 
across the business. They combine to make 
Greene King the company that it is and 
deliver the greatest source of competitive 
advantage for our shareholders, particularly 
in such a demanding trading environment. 

I would like to extend my heartfelt thanks 
to every one of our team for their personal 
and collective contribution. Looking ahead, 
we do not expect short-term conditions to 
improve but I am confident that the team 
at Greene King will continue to drive the 
business forward and deliver further success.

Tim Bridge
Chairman
26 June 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

5

REVIEW oF THE YEAR
Our business 

We have 2,250 pubs, restaurants and hotels and we brew the country’s 
leading cask ale brands. We operate through three main business units.

Retail

Pub Partners

Our Retail business is split into two divisions: Destination 
Pubs and Restaurants, with 500 sites, comprising our 
industry-leading retail brands such as Hungry Horse, 
Old English Inns, Eating Inns, Loch Fyne Restaurants 
and Farmhouse Inns; and Local Pubs, with 480 sites, 
comprising mainly branded and unbranded in local 
communities across the UK. At the year end we had:

Our Pub Partners business offers entrepreneurs the 
opportunity to run our pubs in England, Wales and 
Scotland on a tenanted, leased or franchised basis. We 
aim to deliver industry-leading agreement innovation 
to ensure we can recruit and retain the best licensees.

inns and hotels

pub restaurants

199  HUNGRY HoRSE
108  oLd ENGLISH INNS
28  EATING INN
42  LoCH FYNE
483  LoCAL PUBS

pubs and restaurants

pub restaurants

restaurants

978

tenanted pubs

253

leased pubs

Our tenanted model is based on a more 
hands-on approach to working with our 
licensees and works particularly well for 
first-time licensees or those who do not 
wish to take on the extra responsibility 
of a lease. Our new agreements provide 
incentives for tenants who build their 
business and improve customer loyalty.

Our leased model offers longer, assignable 
lease agreements with full repairing and 
insuring liability sitting with the lessee. 
These agreements attract the more 
entrepreneurial licensees who require 
more freedom to run their business 
as they would like.

38

franchised/
franchise style pubs

We have two agreements: ‘Meet & Eat’ 
is a food, drink, service and entertainment 
package for the value community segment, 
while ‘Local Hero’ is designed for wet-let 
community pubs and is based around 
an extended cask ale offering with 
local provenance.

 oPERATIoNAL REVIEW
pages 14 to 18

 oPERATIoNAL REVIEW
pages 19 to 21

6

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

OUR AIM
To be Britain’s best pubs 
and beer business

Our business model relies on all three 
parts of our business contributing 
to our success. 

Our smaller two businesses, Pub Partners 
and Brewing & Brands, are highly cash 
generative and therefore help fund our 
Retail growth and add to Retail’s 
purchasing scale.

Pub 
Partners

Brewing 
& Brands

Retail

Together, these three businesses 
help us drive attractive shareholder 
returns and deliver earnings and 
dividend growth.

To achieve this, underpinning everything 
we do is a commitment from all our 
businesses to deliver value, service 
and quality to all our customers.

Brewing & Brands

Our Brewing & Brands division operates two breweries, 
in Bury St Edmunds and in Dunbar. We brew, distribute, 
market and sell a wide range of award-winning crafted 
ales and have, for many years, been Britain’s leading 
cask ale brewer, investing more in cask beer than any 
other brewer. 

 OLd SPECKLEd HEN

No.1 premium ale in the UK
No.1 premium cask ale in the UK 
No.1 ale in Scotland 

bELHAvEN bESt

 AbbOt ALE

We have a great range of best-quality permanent and seasonal ales 
available in the on-trade and we are the UK’s leading bottled ale 
brewer with a 16.7% value market share.

 OPERATIONAL REVIEW
pages 22 to 24

 OUR StRAtEGY
pages 12 and 13

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

7

REVIEW oF THE YEAR
Our markets 

We aim to grow our market share utilising our industry-leading 
brands, our high quality asset base and our talented teams.

Market overview

Introduction
The key markets in which we compete 
are the UK drinking out, eating out and 
staying out markets. In each market, we 
aim to grow our market share utilising our 
industry-leading brands, our high quality 
asset base and our talented teams. Over the 
last 12 months we have met those aims within 
Greene King Retail, our largest and fastest 
growing business. Beer volumes per pub 
in Pub Partners, our tenanted, leased and 
franchised division, have also outperformed 
the UK on-trade beer market, while 
own-brewed volumes of our core ale brands 
have outperformed the total UK ale market.

Environmental analysis
Political
The UK Government has been giving out 
mixed messages regarding its approach 
to the UK pubs and beer industries. At the 
budget during the year, we saw the first cut 
in beer duty since the 1950s, alongside the 
scrapping of the beer duty escalator, which 
had been responsible for increasing duty by 
almost 40% since 2007. It is pleasing that 
the Government recognised that beer, 
primarily drunk in pubs, was not the cause 
of the rising incidence of alcohol-related 
illness in the UK, and that it needed more 
support. However, tax on beer, including 
duty and VAT, is still high, at around one 
third of the price of a pint, and therefore 
we are hopeful that the Government will 
continue to reduce beer duty going forward. 
At the same time, reform of Progressive Beer 
Duty is needed to rebalance the significant 
tax advantage that micro-breweries have 
over those that invest and grow and pay 
the full rate. 

aimed at transferring over £100m of value from 
pub companies to licensees. We have made 
a detailed submission to the consultation, 
advocating the continuation of self-regulation, 
which has worked well for Greene King for 
over 200 years, instead of the introduction 
of a Statutory Code with an independent 
Adjudicator and all of the costs and red-tape 
associated with it. 

Our support for a minimum unit price 
(MUP) for alcohol remains, despite the 
continued delay in Government’s response 
to the consultation on its Alcohol Strategy. 
We believe MUP, alongside other measures 
such as improved alcohol education, can 
be a highly effective measure in reducing 
irresponsible retailing and consuming of 
alcohol, therefore helping to reduce the costs 
to society of rising alcohol-related illness and 
crime. We do not see the UK Government 
making a decision on MUP until the legal 
process in Scotland is resolved. 

Economic
It has been another year of minimal growth 
within the UK economy. Real GDP has still 
not recovered to the peak levels experienced 
in 2007, before the credit crunch, and it is 
easily the longest and deepest economic 
slump since detailed records began. Most 
importantly to our business, real household 
income remains under pressure as cost 
inflation continues to run ahead of wage 
inflation, meaning our customers are not 
confident enough to return to the spending 
patterns of pre-2007. This suggests that our 
focus on delivering industry-leading value, 
service and quality continues to be the best 
approach, as we offer ‘everyday treats’ to 
our customers in our pubs across the UK. 

Government has changed its approach to the 
much investigated relationship between pub 
companies and licensees. Having previously 
recognised the strength of the tied model 
and the improvements, via self-regulation, 
that the industry was making, there was a 
complete about turn in opinion during the 
year. Government announced a consultation 
including a series of proposed measures 

Social
UK alcohol consumption is in decline 
although it is difficult to differentiate between 
the economic and social reasons for this 
decline. Beer consumption is in steeper 
decline, averaging 2.4% per annum since 
2002. Factors driving this decline include 
a more health conscious UK consumer and 
increased leisure alternatives to the pub. 

In addition, partly due to the price differential 
between the on- and off-trades and partly 
due to the continuous improvement of home 
entertainment, there is an increasing 
propensity to consume alcohol at home. 
Beer consumption in the on-trade has declined 
at an average of 4.6% per annum since 2002, 
including a 4.7% decline in 2012, while the 
off-trade has increased by 0.2% per annum 
over the same period, although there was 
also a 4.6% decline in 2012. 

The UK consumer is also continuing to 
eat out more due to time pressures and the 
increasing value offered by competitors 
in this market. The value of the informal 
eating out market has grown by 2.9% since 
2007 to stand at £54bn by the end of 2012. 
Within this, pubs have been taking a greater 
share of the growth as they have improved 
the relative quality and value of their offer 
against other ‘casual dining’ competitors. 
Against an overall growth in informal eating 
out of 1.6% in 2012, pub and bar food grew 
1.9%*. We expect these trends to continue. 

Finally, the UK staying out market has also 
benefited from the improved provision of 
budget and mid-market accommodation, 
satisfying the increased demand for business 
related overnight accommodation and, 
particularly in the recession, an increase 
in domestic holidays and short breaks. 
Revenue per available room (RevPAR) in the 
UK has risen 14.1%* since 2009 and grew 1.0%** 
in 2012. Although growth may be moderate 
in the near-term, we still expect long-term 
value growth in this market.

*  Allegra Eating Out Report 2013.
**  PWC.

8

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Greene King performance

EATING oUT
Against an informal eating out market up 1.6% in value 
terms in 2012 (pub and bar food up 1.9%)1, Greene King 
Retail delivered LFL food sales growth of 2.9% and 
total food growth of 9.7% in its financial year. In the 
last five years, Greene King Retail has grown its food 
sales by 75%.

dRINKING oUT
With the value of alcohol in the on-trade up 1.3% in 
20121, Greene King Retail has delivered drink LFL sales 
growth of 1.8% and total drink sales growth of 6.7%.

Against the UK ale market down 3.9%3 in the 12 months 
to April 2013, Greene King’s core brands saw volumes 
up 1.0% in the same period, while Pub Partners achieved 
average beer volume per pub in line with the previous year.

STAYING oUT
In a UK provincial market that with RevPAR decline 
in 2012 of 0.5%4, Greene King Retail’s accommodation 
business delivered RevPAR growth of 2.0% in the 
financial year to April 2013.

CUMULATIVE Food SALES GRoWTH 
2011–2013 (%)

20%
15%
10%
5%
0%
-5%

2011

2012

2013

• Market growth 

• GK Retail LFL sales

CUMULATIVE dRINK SALES GRoWTH 
2011–2013 (%)

8%
6%
4%
2%
0%
-2%
-4%

2011

2012

2013

• Market growth 

• GK Retail LFL sales

CUMULATIVE ACCoMModATIoN 
SALES GRoWTH 2011–2013 (%)

12%
10%
8%
6%
4%
2%
0%

2011

2012

2013

• Market growth 

• GK Retail LFL sales

MARKET SIzE1

£54bn

GREENE KING RETAIL SALES

£337m

GREENE KING RETAIL 
MARKET SHARE

0.6%

MARKET SIzE2

£22bn

GREENE KING RETAIL SALES

£480m

GREENE KING RETAIL 
MARKET SHARE

2.2%

MARKET SIzE5

£27bn

GREENE KING RETAIL SALES

£25m

GREENE KING RETAIL 
MARKET SHARE

0.9%

1  Allegra Eating Out Report 2013
2 CGA Brand Index
3 BBPA
4 PWC
5 Eurostat, PWC, Allegra, Company

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

9

BUSINESS REVIEW
Chief executive’s review 

ANOTHER 
STRONG YEAR

“ The robustness of our business and our proven 
strategy ensured we delivered further strong 
growth and record results for our shareholders.”

Performance summary
It has been another strong year for Greene 
King, delivering record results for our 
shareholders. This was led by a successful 
trading performance from our largest and 
fastest growing business, Greene King Retail, 
achieving 12.1% operating profit growth:

 • Group revenue was £1,194.7m, up 4.8%.

 • Operating profit before exceptional items 

was up 5.1% at £248.2m.

 • The operating margin was up ten basis 
points to 20.8%, despite the business 
mix change.

 • Profit before tax and exceptional items 

was £162.0m, up 6.6%. 

 • Adjusted earnings per share grew 7.5% 

to 57.0p.

 • The board has recommended a final 
dividend of 19.45p per share, up 7.5%.

 • ROCE improved a further 40 basis points 

to 8.9%. 

Even though we experienced a long, cold 
and wet winter, the robustness of our business 
and our proven strategy ensured we delivered 
further strong growth in revenue, up 4.8%, with 
Retail leading the way with growth of 7.4%. 

We continue to focus on providing our 
customers with the best value, service and 

quality across our three main markets of 
eating out, drinking out and staying out. 
This helped us deliver like-for-like (LFL) 
sales growth of 2.3% in Retail, split 4.3% 
growth in the first half and 0.6% growth in 
the second half (reflecting the more difficult 
trading conditions experienced after the 
New Year). This underlying growth was 
supported by another positive contribution 
from new sites. Retail now generates over 
72% of group revenue.

Further productivity improvements in labour, 
tight cost control and acquisition synergy 
benefits drove strong margin growth in 
Retail, which more than offset the negative 
impact of our changing business mix on the 
group operating margin. Operating profit 
before exceptional items grew 5.1%.

Our strong performance delivered adjusted 
earnings per share growth of 7.5% and 
dividend growth of 7.3% for our shareholders 
in the third year of our retail expansion plan. 
The impact of estate changes, growing the size 
and quality of our retail estate and reducing 
the size, while improving the quality, of our 
tenanted and leased estate, has driven further 
improvements in our ROCE. In the year, 
ROCE rose 40 basis points (bps) to 8.9%, 
ahead of our cost of capital. 

We made substantial financial progress in 
the year helping to further strengthen our 
balance sheet and financial resilience. After 
the year end, we refinanced our revolving 
credit facility, using an additional £60m to 
buy back our AB1 bonds ahead of their step-up, 
and we completed the latest triennial pension 
review, leading to a lower annual cash 
funding requirement.

This was the first year of our three year 
partnership with Macmillan Cancer Support 
to raise £1m. It has been successful so far, 
raising £300,000 in the first year, including 
raising £100,000 for the ‘World’s Biggest 
Coffee Morning’.

Overview
Our strong performance and record results 
were delivered in another year of tough 
economic conditions, a generally difficult 
regulatory environment, highly competitive 
markets and constantly shifting consumer 
trends. We also had to deal with a year of 
unprecedented weather, particularly in some 
of our most important trading months. Both 
June and July were abnormally wet, while 
October and March were abnormally cold. 
While we hope for better weather in the 
new financial year, we do not expect 
to see material change in the economic 
or political environment. 

10

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Current trading and outlook
In the first eight weeks of the new financial 
year, we have delivered another strong trading 
performance, against tough comparatives 
with last year, which benefited from the 
Jubilee and Euro 2012. LFL sales in Retail 
were up 3.3%, helped by improved weather 
on both Bank Holiday weekends. Both food 
LFL sales and room LFL sales have been 
particularly strong. Average EBITDA in 
Pub Partners was up 5.1% and core OBV 
in Brewing & Brands was up 1.5%, taking 
further market share and continuing the 
momentum from the second half of the 
previous financial year. 

Although we have made a strong start, the 
overall outlook remains subdued and we are 
not assuming a pick-up in the economy this 
year. However, our strategy is designed, and 
proven to be appropriate, for these conditions 
as we shift our business towards higher 
growth areas of our markets and constantly 
improve our customer offer. We are confident 
of maintaining this momentum and delivering 
further value to our shareholders.

Rooney Anand
Chief executive officer
26 June 2013 

Economic conditions through the year 
remained subdued. After five years, we have 
still not returned to the real GDP levels of 
2007, before the economic slump began. 
Numerous key measures, such as house prices, 
consumer confidence and household earnings 
are sluggish, although there is a degree of 
resilience to the employment market.

Improving customer information and insight 
is therefore crucial to delivering sustainable 
sector-leading growth and margins. As a 
result, we made further investment in our 
digital platform and customer insight, 
covering areas such as targeted voucher 
offers, maintaining a regular dialogue 
with customers through social media 
and facilitating online table reservations. 

From a regulatory perspective, there are 
three key issues facing the industry:

1.  Beer Duty. The scrapping of the beer 

duty escalator was a welcome move and 
we are hopeful of additional duty reform 
going forward. 

2.  Statutory Code. We believe the proposal 

for a statutory code to govern the 
relationship between pub companies and 
licensees is unnecessary. We have fully 
participated in the consultation process 
and have argued for more time to be 
given to the current, legally-binding, 
self-regulatory code to prove its worth, 
particularly for brewery-tied tenanted 
operators like Greene King.

3.  Minimum Unit Pricing. We remain 
supporters of a minimum unit price 
(MUP) for alcohol. We believe it would 
help to reduce the costs to society of 
irresponsible retailing and consumption 
of alcohol, although we do not expect 
legislation on MUP in this parliament. 

We primarily operate in three UK markets: 
informal eating out, worth £54bn*, drinking 
out, worth £22bn** and staying out, worth 
£27bn***. These are large, profitable and 
fragmented markets with long-term growth 
potential and opportunities for us to grow 
market share. Our focus on delivering industry 
leading value, service and quality, providing 
‘affordable treats’ to customers, combined 
with accelerating offer innovation, gives us 
a significant competitive advantage. It ensures 
we optimise the opportunities within each 
market, particularly in accessible growth 
segments and occasions such as breakfasts 
and takeaways in eating out, the trend towards 
premiumisation in drinking out and pub 
accommodation within staying out. 

We can also deliver competitive advantage 
through improved understanding of 
consumers and their evolving preferences. 
We anticipate trends such as health, 
convenience and customisation to grow 
in importance over the next few years and 
we are positioning our offers accordingly. 

*  Allegra Eating Out Report 2013.
**  CGA Brand Index.
***  Eurostat, PWC, Allegra, Company.

Strategic progress
We are three years into our five-year strategy 
to improve growth and returns to shareholders 
through increasing our exposure to more 
attractive categories in our markets. We made 
further progress in all areas as we continue to 
invest in a successful future for Greene King:

1.  Expanding Retail to 1,100 sites and 

improving estate quality. We acquired 
or transferred in 38 sites to take the estate 
to 987 pubs, restaurants and hotels. 
Of the 38 sites, 15 were new Hungry Horse 
openings and 11 were Meet & Eat transfers. 
We opened our 200th Hungry Horse just 
after the year end. Since we began our 
strategy, the acquired sites have delivered 
an average site EBITDA ROI of 15.0%. 

2.  Reducing the Pub Partners estate, 

improving estate quality and increasing 
our offer influence. In Pub Partners, 
we disposed of 103 non-core sites and 
transferred 14 sites to Retail. Average 
EBITDA per pub grew 4.2% and there 
were 38 franchise and franchise-style 
sites at the year end. There are 331 sites, 
or 26% of the Pub Partners estate, under 
central offer influence. 

3.  Maintain industry-leading brand 

investment to strengthen leadership 
position. We again invested in our 
core ale brands to drive core own brewed 
volume (OBV) growth and UK ale market 
outperformance in Brewing & Brands. 
We relaunched TV advertising for Greene 
King IPA, Old Speckled Hen and Belhaven 
Best and our investment took a 45%* share 
of all ale media spend in the year. 

* Nielsen MAT to 31 March 2013.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

11

BUSINESS REVIEW
Our strategy

Building the best UK pubs and beer business

Retail

PRIoRITIES

Our key priorities are to grow our Retail estate to 1,100 sites, 
to improve the overall estate quality and to increase our 
exposure to the UK eating out market.

KPIs

1.  Number of sites

2.  LFL sales

3. 

 Average EBITDA 
per site

4.   Food as a percentage 

of sales

Pub Partners

PRIoRITIES

KPIs

Our key priority is to reduce the size of the Pub Partners 
estate to a maximum of 1,200 sites. We also aim to improve 
the overall estate quality and to continue to exert greater 
influence over the customer offer in our tenanted sites.

1.  Number of trading sites

2.  Average EBITDA per site

3. 

 Number of pubs where 
we influence the offer

Brewing & Brands

PRIoRITIES

KPIs

Our key priorities for our Brewing & Brands business 
during the year were to grow our core brand own brewed 
volume and market share through investment in our brands 
and to focus on growing our key growth markets of take 
home and North America.

1.  Core brand OBV

2.  Market share

3. 

 Sales in take home 
and North America 

12

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Retail

Pub Partners

Brewing & Brands

PERFoRMANCE

PLANS FoR 2013/14

MoRE

1. 

 987 at year end, up from 
954 at the start of the year

2.  Up 2.3%

3.  Up 6.9% to £218.6k

4. 

 40% of sales, 
up from 39% last year

We intend to continue our estate expansion 
during the forthcoming year, adding around 50 
sites to the estate through a combination of new 
builds, pub and hotel acquisitions, and transfers 
from Pub Partners. We aim to drive LFL sales 
growth across all our key sales categories leading 
to an improvement in EBITDA per site. We believe 
Retail can get to 45% food sales share over the 
next few years.

For a more detailed 
review of Retail, 
please turn to page 14.

PERFoRMANCE

PLANS FoR 2013/14

MoRE

1. 

 1,269 at year end, down 
from 1,380 at the start 
of the year

2.  Up 4.2% to £57.5k

3. 

 331 sites, equivalent to 
26% of the trading estate

We will continue to target disposals during the 
year to continue the estate reduction plan and 
reach around 1,200 sites in 2014. As well as 
achieving further average EBITDA growth per 
site, we also aim to increase the number of sites 
operating under a franchise or innovation 
agreement, where we have greater influence 
over the customer offer.

Further information on 
Pub Partners’ progress 
can be found on page 19.

PERFoRMANCE

PLANS FoR 2013/14

MoRE

1. 

 +0.1% in the year vs ale 
market down 3.9%

2.  + 0.1 % to 10.5% 

3.  + 8.2%

We are aiming for another year of volume growth 
in our core brands and increased market share 
despite the market conditions, by continuing to 
invest in our core brands. We will aim to stabilise 
EBITDA and try to improve operational 
efficiencies to off-set input cost inflation 
and protect operating margins.

Turn to page 22 for more 
detail on Brewing & Brands.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

13

BUSINESS REVIEW
Operational review

Retail

Our Retail division comprises 504 branded 
destination pubs and restaurants and 483 
unbranded but segmented local pubs across 
Britain, appealing to a broad range 
of the population. 

Our brands:

REVENUE

£863.6m +7.4%

72% 

oF ToTAL REVENUE

Highlights of the year
•	 Like-for-like sales +2.3%
•	 Food sales +9.7%
•	 Operating profit +12.1%
•	 Sites acquired 38

14

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Retail

INCREASING ExPOSURE 
TO GROWTH CATEGORIES
Much of our food-led growth comes 
from increasing our exposure to growth 
categories. This includes our increased 
focus on food, wine and coffee. During 
the year we launched our own coffee 
brand, Big Bean, which has been rolled 
out across our Hungry Horse estate, 
helping sales of hot drinks to grow 6.2%, 
and we expect this to grow further as 
we increase our breakfast trade.

Retail

INNOVATING TO MEET 
EATING OUT TRENdS
We continue to pursue a strategy 
of increasing our share of the £54bn 
eating-out market by innovating to 
meet eating out trends. We have 
introduced a wide range of sharing 
platters, particularly in our Locals 
estate, which are popular with 
‘after work’ customers. 

Retail

Greene King Retail delivered another 
successful year, combining strong growth 
with further strategic progress. LFL sales 
growth was 2.3%, outperforming the sector 
average growth of 0.5%*, as the industry 
was hit by challenging weather in the second 
half of our financial year. Over the last five 
years, Retail has delivered average annual 
LFL sales growth of 3.3%. Of the 2.3% LFL 
sales growth in the year, 0.4% was driven 
by volume improvements and 1.9% by price, 
mix and spend per head improvements. 
All major sales categories achieved growth 
with food LFL sales up 2.9%, drink LFL sales 
up 1.8% and room LFL sales up 3.1%. London 
performed well with Realpubs achieving 
9.1% LFL sales growth. 

Total revenue was £863.6m, up 7.4% on 3.5% 
more sites. As a result, the average weekly 
take grew 3.8% to £17.1k. Retail also achieved 
strong profit growth, with operating profit 
of £167.7m, up 12.1%. The operating margin 
was 19.4%, an improvement of 80bps, driven 
by strong operational gearing, improved 
labour productivity, the delivery of acquisition 
synergies, and despite the weaker second 
half sales environment. 

*  Coffer Peach Tracker.

There are a number of key factors driving 
the continued success in Retail:

1.   Exceeding customer value, 

service & quality expectations
 • Value. The flight to value by UK consumers, 
as they seek out ‘everyday treats’, continued 
in the year. We maintained a healthy balance 
between offering further value to our 
customers and continuing to improve our 
retail margins. In Hungry Horse, we increased 
the share of all covers sold through offers, 
while we simplified and improved our 
centrepiece two for £8.49 offer to all day, 
every day. In Loch Fyne Restaurants (LFR), 
we introduced ‘Loch Fyne Favourites’ via 
a meal and drink offer at £9.95, while in 
Old English Inns (OEI), we launched a lunch 
deal highlighting a sandwich, crisps and 
a drink for £4.95. In our Scottish sites, we 
lowered the average coffee price and increased 
the average serve size, while in Local Pubs 
we introduced additional known value item 
pricing on lager and for early week occasions. 

 • Service. We continued to roll out our 

tailored service enhancement programmes 
across the retail estate. Our ‘Hungry for 
Feedback’ guest satisfaction programme 
in Hungry Horse had over 70,000 customer 
responses in the year delivering a net 

promoter score (NPS) of 59.6% and 40,000 
positive individual employee comments. Our 
LFR ‘Keeping it Reel’ programme delivered 
a record NPS, halved customer complaints 
and doubled customer compliments, while 
guest satisfaction programmes were launched 
in Farmhouse Inns and Eating Inn.

 • Quality. In Local Pubs, we launched our 
Flame Grill family dining concept in the 
mainstream community segment, where 
we improved the quality of our unique grill 
offer through increased kitchen investment 
and more fresh meat items. In Eating Inn 
and Belhaven, we increased the number of 
fresh, homemade dishes, while we introduced 
improved menu specifications and additional 
carvery training into Farmhouse Inns. 
Across the whole of the Destination Pubs 
estate, our guest satisfaction score for food 
quality improved 16%pts through the year.

No issues were found in our supply chain 
during the horsemeat scandal that affected 
the food industry in February and March. 
We have a robust supply chain with thorough 
quality control procedures, although we took 
this opportunity to further strengthen 
procedures to ensure we provide the highest 
quality ingredients and we remain clear of 
any future industry mislabelling issues. 

 KEY PERFoRMANCE INdICAToRS

AVERAGE NUMBER oF TRAdING SITES 
(NUMBER)

971 +3.5% 

REVENUE (£M)

EBITdA (£M)

£863.6m +7.4% 

£212.3m +10.7% 

1000

950

900

850

800

750

9
7
1

9
3
8

8
9
2

900.0

800.0

700.0

600.0

500.0

400.0

8
6
3
6

.

8
0
3
9

.

7
1
0
7

.

225.0

200.0

175.0

150.0

125.0

100.0

2
1
2
3

.

1
9
1
.
7

1
7
3
0

.

2011

2012

2013

2011

2012

2013

2011

2012

2013

oPERATING PRoFIT (£M)

oPERATING PRoFIT MARGIN (%)

AVERAGE EBITdA PER SITE (£K)

£167.7m +12.1% 

19.4% +0.8%pts

£218.6k +6.9% 

170.0

160.0

150.0

140.0

130.0

120.0

1
6
7
.
7

1
3
2
0

.

1
4
9
6

.

1
9
4

.

1
8
6

.

1
8
6

.

20.0

19.0

18.0

17.0

16.0

15.0

1
9
3
9

.

2
0
4
4

.

2
1
8
6

.

240.0

200.0

160.0

120.0

80.0

40.0

2011

2012

2013

2011

2012

2013

2011

2012

2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

17

BUSINESS REVIEW
Operational review continued

Retail

2.  Broadening customer appeal 
through growth categories 
such as food, wine & coffee
We continue to pursue our strategy of 
increasing our share of the £54bn eating out 
market and increasing our share of sales driven 
by food and food occasions. On an organic 
basis, we primarily achieve this by broadening 
the appeal of our food offers to drive cover 
growth, alongside selected price and mix 
improvements to help offset annual 
cost inflation.

Against a market with value growth of 1.6%*, 
Retail food sales were up 9.7% to £336.9m. 
This took food’s share of our total sales to 40%, 
up 80bps on the previous year. Food LFL sales 
were up 2.9% with cover growth of 0.4%.

Much of our food growth comes from 
innovating to meet eating out consumer 
trends. We have identified three key trends: 

 • Customisation. We developed ‘fish your 
way’ in LFR, ‘burger your way’ in Eating 
Inn, and ‘build your own burger’ in Flame 
Grill and Meet & Eat. In Eating Inn, there 
are 560 different combinations of burger 
for a customer to choose from. 

 • Convenience. Our Cakeaway offer in 

Hungry Horse generated sales of £750k 
in the first full year and in our Local high 
street sites, we improved the breakfast 
offer, launched a lunchtime deli deal, 
and introduced a wider range of sharing 
platters for ‘after work’ customers. 

 • Health. We introduced a ‘live well’ section 
on our Eating Inn menu for dishes under 
700 calories and we stepped up the number 
of gluten free dishes in our menus. 

Wine and coffee are also important long-term 
growth categories for Retail.

Wine sales grew 15.8% and are now up 
62% in the last five years. On a per site basis, 
wine sales grew 11.8%. Our wines won 25 
International Wine Challenge awards this 
year, including 19 sourced directly by our 
expert wine team. In Metropolitan, our 
premium Local Pubs estate, we introduced 
a dedicated wine specialist and developed 
our own premium, directly sourced, 
own-label brand, Piazzi.

Hot beverage sales, of which coffee is 75%, 
grew 6.2% and we expect further growth as 
we grow our breakfast trade. We launched our 
own coffee brand, Big Bean, which has been 
successfully rolled out across the Hungry 
Horse estate. Across the rest of the estate, 
86% of our sites use illy as their coffee offer. 

* Allegra Eating Out Report 2013.

3.  Further aligning our estate 
to our customers through 
targeted acquisitions

We have targeted 1,100 sites by 2015 and we 
remain on track to achieve this. In the year, 
we increased our trading estate by a net 
33 sites, having acquired or transferred in 
38 sites and disposed of five non-core sites. 
This took the estate to 987 pubs, restaurants 
and hotels. Of those new sites, 12 were 
single-site acquisitions, 12 were new build 
openings, including our first Hungry Horse 
leasehold site, and 14 were transfers from 
Pub Partners, including 11 Meet & Eat sites. 
These transfers are supporting the expansion 
of the Meet & Eat brand within Retail. In 
addition, our pipeline for further expansion 
is healthy and we exchanged or completed 
on a further 30 sites. 

4.  Employing the best trained & 
motivated people in the sector
We have over 22,000 employees across the 
business. 94% work within Retail, taking part 
in 440m customer interactions each year. 
We therefore constantly look to improve the 
calibre of our teams to deliver the best value, 
service and quality in the sector. There are 
a number of ways this is achieved, including 
improving the working environment and 
building employee loyalty to Greene King as 
an employer brand through initiatives such 
as enhanced employee benefits, more effective 
communication and improved recruitment 
and training processes. 

At the heart of our approach is our 
Discovery Apprentice scheme, which we 
began in January 2011. The introduction of 
apprenticeships has improved the culture 
within Retail, as team members can more 
easily see a career path in hospitality ahead 
of them. We continue to grow the scheme 
and deliver excellent results: at the year end, 
we had almost 2,500 apprentices in Retail, 
of which 1,300 were ‘in learning’ and 1,200 
were fully trained. This equates to 12.3% of 
our Retail team, compared to 8.2% 12 months 
ago. Most importantly, 71% of our apprentices 
have successfully completed the programme, 
ahead of the national average of 62%. 

This focus on, and success of, our 
apprenticeship scheme has positively 
influenced team turnover, down 8%pts, 
employee engagement, up 4%pts, and labour 
productivity, which was 2.3% better than 
last year.

Finally, we believe that our positive reputation 
as an employer is attracting more and more 
people to work for Greene King. For example, 
we average 12 applications for every job 
vacancy in our new build sites, equivalent 
to almost 800 applications per site.

5.  Continued investment in our 
branded & segmented estate 

In our retail estate, we operate branded sites 
or sites segmented by customer occasion and 
demographics. We re-segmented our Local 
Pubs estate into five segments: Metropolitan, 
Mainstream High Street, Flame Grill, Meet 
& Eat and Value Sport. The new segmentation 
further simplifies the operating structure in 
Local Pubs and brings our Flame Grill and 
Meet & Eat concepts to the fore. Excluding 
these concepts, our fully branded pubs, 
restaurants and hotels represent 40% of our 
retail estate, with our leading brand, Hungry 
Horse, at 199 trading sites at the year end. 
Just after the year end, we opened our 
200th Hungry Horse, the Royal Horse in 
Leamington Spa, and we anticipate opening 
a further 25 in the new financial year. Also 
at the year end, there were 108 Old English 
Inns, 42 Loch Fyne Restaurants, 28 Eating 
Inns and 16 Farmhouse Inns, the former 
Cloverleaf estate.

We converted seven sites to the Realpubs 
or Capital Pub Company formats. On average, 
all the converted sites are delivering an 
EBITDA ROI of 33%, although we expect 
investment returns to moderate going forward.

In total, we spent £70.1m on repairing, 
maintaining and improving the quality of 
our existing retail estate, of which £31.7m 
was expansionary capital. This was invested 
in 140 sites, or 14.2% of the estate, and 
achieved an EBITDA ROI of 26%.

6.  Increasing investment in our 
expanding digital platform 
Investment in our digital platform has 
continued as we improve our customer 
understanding, directly target our tailored 
offers to the right demographics and occasions, 
and use direct feedback to improve the retail 
offer. Traffic on our websites grew 50% to 7.2m 
over the year with mobile traffic trebling to 
31% of the total, up from 17% last year. We 
averaged 138,000 ‘hits’ per week in total. 
Online table reservations grew 26% and 
generated £3.2m in sales. At the year end, 
we had 224,000 Facebook followers, up from 
23,000 last year. Our combined databases grew 
by 76%, we sent out over 20m marketing emails, 
our loyalty card holders increased ten-fold 
and our guest satisfaction feedback forms 
totalled 167,000. 

18

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Pub Partners

Pub Partners is responsible for operating 
our tenanted, franchised and leased pubs 
across Britain and aims to ensure that each 
pub has the right licensee to operate it, on 
the right agreement, with the right offer.

Our main agreements:
•	 Touchstone tenancy agreement
•	 Touchstone Plus tenancy agreement
•	 Access tenancy agreement
•	 Horizon lease agreement
•	 Meet & Eat franchise agreement
•	 Local Hero franchise-style agreement

REVENUE

£153.7m -5.5%

13% 

oF ToTAL REVENUE

Highlights of the year
•	 Licensee retention 83%
•	 Franchise or franchise-style sites 38
•	 Sites with an element of offer 

influence 26%

•	 Average tenure four years eight months

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

19

Pub Partners

SUPPORTING 
OUR LICENSEES
Our Business Development Managers 
are highly trained to support our 
licensee partners in a range of areas, 
including pre contract-signing advice, 
to ensure they have the right information 
to choose the right agreement for their 
circumstances. This BDM support is 
essential to help us attract the best 
licensees into our pubs. We also provide 
online marketing support and on-going 
training and advice in a number of areas.

Pub Partners

 KEY PERFoRMANCE 
INdICAToRS
AVERAGE NUMBER oF TRAdING SITES 
(NUMBER)

1,326 -8.8% 

1,600

1,500

1,400

1,300

1,200

1,100

1
,
5
5
4

1
,
4
5
4

1
,
3
2
6

2011

2012

2013

REVENUE (£M)

£153.7m -5.5% 

180.0

160.0

140.0

120.0

100.0

80.0

1
6
6
4

.

1
6
2
7

.

1
5
3
.
7

2011

2012

2013

EBITdA (£M)

£76.3m -4.9% 

90.0

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

8
2
6

.

8
0
2

.

7
6
3

.

2011

2012

2013

The tenanted and leased model has become 
challenged over the last five years and our 
response has been to reduce the size of our 
estate and to enhance our influence over the 
customer offer to improve licensee and pub 
sustainability. Pub Partners plays an important 
role in Greene King, through generating 
significant cash for the group, adding material 
purchasing scale and providing attractive 
yields on smaller pub sites.

On 8.8% fewer pubs, Pub Partners achieved 
revenue of £153.7m, down 5.5%. Revenue 
per pub was up 3.6%, with beer volume per 
pub in line and rent per pub ahead. EBITDA 
was £76.3m, down 4.9%, although average 
EBITDA per pub was up 4.2%. LFL EBITDA 
in the core estate was up 0.1% and total LFL 
EBITDA was level with the previous year, 
highlighting the profit and cash stability of 
Pub Partners. Operating profit was £68.1m, 
down 5.7%, with the operating margin 
holding up at 44.3%, down just 10bps.

Pub Partners is focused on operating the 
right pubs, with the right people, on the 
right agreement with the right offer:

 • Right pubs. We progressed our plan to 
reduce the size of the estate. We sold 103 
non-core sites and transferred 14 to Retail. 
This left 1,269 trading sites and 44 sites 
closed for disposal at the year end. 
We expect to dispose of around 125 sites 
during the new financial year. 

 • Right people. The recruitment of high 

quality licensees to run our pubs remains 
the most important element of the Pub 
Partners model. We made a number of 
improvements to our recruitment process, 
including the regionalisation of our 
recruitment teams and the introduction of 
licensee profiling. As a result, the number 
of new licensees in their pub, after one 
year, reached 83%. We also stepped up our 
licensee training, including a new service 
programme. Licensees that attended the 
course saw an average 12.5%pts increase 
in their mystery guest service scores.  

Having the best Business Development 
Managers (BDMs) is an important 
differentiator. During the year, 12 BDMs 
completed their diplomas in Multi-Unit 
Leadership at Birmingham City University 
and three have gone onto the Masters 
programme. We also began supporting 
our licensees to recruit apprentices into 
their businesses, saving them £1,500 per 
employee in labour costs. At the year end, 
there were 82 apprentices in the Pub 
Partners estate. 

 • Right agreements. Our new suite of 

agreements, including Touchstone and 
Touchstone Plus tenancies, started to gain 
traction, with 108 new agreements in place 
at the year end. We also had 38 franchise 
or franchise-style agreements, with our 
innovative concept, Local Hero, growing 
strongly. There were 17 Local Hero sites 
at the year end delivering an average £3k 
sales uplift and an EBITDA ROI of 31%. 
We anticipate the Local Hero estate 
rising to around 30 sites over the new 
financial year. 

 • Right offer. We do all we can to help our 
licensees deliver the right customer offer 
to maximise profits and align their interests 
with ours. At the year end, we had 830 sites, 
or 65% of the trading estate, on some form 
of free-of-tie (FOT) agreement, including 
21 sites completely FOT. We had 331 sites, 
or 26% of the estate, under an element of 
central offer influence and we provided 
800 sites with free advertising boards to 
improve their external offer communication. 
We launched a digital support tool called 
Footfall 123, which led to 85 sites initiating 
a loyalty card scheme, and our Sports Club 
and Head Brewers Cask Club each had 
over 300 members by the year end. 

As a result of these initiatives, two additional 
key metrics improved during the year. 
Average licensee tenure increased by one 
month to four years and eight months, while 
our licensee NPS increased 11%pts to 34.3%, 
better than a number of Pub Partners’ 
retail competitors.

oPERATING PRoFIT (£M)

£68.1m -5.7% 

oPERATING PRoFIT MARGIN (%)

AVERAGE EBITdA PER PUB (£K)

44.3% -0.1%pts 

£57.5k +4.2% 

7
4
5

.

7
2
2

.

6
8
.
1

80.0

70.0

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

4
4
8

.

4
4
4

.

4
4
3

.

46.0

44.0

42.0

40.0

38.0

36.0

5
7
.
5

5
5
2

.

5
3
2

.

60.0

55.0

50.0

45.0

40.0

35.0

2011

2012

2013

2011

2012

2013

2011

2012

2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

21

 
BUSINESS REVIEW
Operational review continued

Brewing & Brands

Brewing & Brands sells and distributes 
to both the on- and the off-trade a wide 
range of award-winning craft ales which 
are brewed in one of our two breweries, 
in Bury St Edmunds and Dunbar. 

Our core brands:

REVENUE

£177.4m +2.1%

15% 

oF ToTAL REVENUE

Highlights of the year
•	 Core own brewed volume was up 

1% against ale market by down 3.9%

•	 Invested 45% of the total ale 

media spend

•	 Successful innovation with 

Old Golden Hen and Belhaven Black 

•	 We are the leading bottled ale 

brewer with value share of 16.7%

22

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Our out-performance is driven by industry-
leading investment and innovation in our 
core ale brand portfolio. During the year, 
Old Speckled Hen, Greene King IPA and 
Belhaven Best returned to television 
advertising as part of a combined £4.5m 
campaign, as we invested 45% of the total 
ale market media investment in the year. 
Our innovative brand extensions, such as 
Old Golden Hen and Belhaven Black, grew 
to around 7% of total OBV.

Our focus on delivering an attractive value 
proposition to our customers has again led 
to new account wins in free trade, including 
Saracens, Worcestershire Cricket Club, 
Sheffield United and Imperial College, 
and across leading national pub retailers.

We maintained our consistently high 
service and quality levels. Our internal 
service measure, covering the whole of our 
supply chain, rose to 97.6%, comfortably 
ahead of target. On quality, Greene King IPA 
Reserve and Greene King IPA Gold won Grand 
Gold and Gold awards respectively at the 
2013 Monde Awards. We put 1,300 delegates 
through the BII cellar management course, 
we retained our Red Tractor status and 
achieved ISO9001 for the 20th year in 
succession. Finally, our visitor centre achieved 
a 2013 Certificate of Excellence from Trip 
Advisor, putting it in the top 10% of global 
visitor attractions for quality.

* 
** 

*** 

BBPA.
 Nielsen Scantrack MAT to 27 April 2013 
& CGA Brand Index MAT to 23 March 13.
 Nielsen Scantrack data 12 week value share 
Mult Grocers.

Brewing & Brands

Brewing & Brands is a strong business with 
market-leading ales, supported by industry-
leading brand investment and a highly efficient 
brewing model, combining to deliver the 
highest ROCE within Greene King. While 
there are significant opportunities for 
long-term growth in parts of our business, 
there are structural headwinds negatively 
impacting elsewhere. These include supplier 
cost increases adversely affecting our free 
trade wholesaling business, particularly in 
Scotland, declining volume in the tenanted 
industry and a reduction in the number 
of Pub Partners’ sites.

The year was split into two. The first half 
saw core own brewed volumes (OBV) down 
0.9% and operating profit down 13.5%, 
while the second half recovery, led by our 
continued sector-leading brand investment 
and innovation, delivered 2.7% core OBV 
growth and operating profit down 4.8%.

Core OBV in Brewing & Brands was up 
1.0%, outperforming a UK ale market down 
3.9%*. Within this strong performance, 
Old Speckled Hen, the UK’s no.1 premium 
ale brand, achieved volume growth of 6.9%, 
against a premium ale market up just 0.2%*. 
In addition, Greene King IPA achieved 
volume growth of 3.3%, against a standard 
ale market down 5.6%*. Our volume share 
of the UK ale market rose to 10.5%**.

Brewing & Brands further repositioned 
towards the long-term growth channels of 
take home and export. After a year of strong 
growth, the share of OBV through these 
channels was up 3.5%pts to 38.3%, driven by 
the success of our golden ales in take home, 
including Greene King IPA Gold and Old 
Golden Hen, and the introduction of our 
new smoothflow can for Greene King IPA. 

Revenue was £177.4m, up 2.1%, helped by 
strong growth in bottled ale, as, since the 
year end, we became the UK’s leading 
bottled ale brewer with a 16.7%*** value 
share. EBITDA fell 7.8% to £35.4m and 
operating profit fell 9.1% to £30.0m.

 KEY PERFoRMANCE 
INdICAToRS

REVENUE (£M)

£177.4m +2.1% 

180.0

170.0

160.0

150.0

140.0

130.0

1
7
7
.
4

1
7
3
8

.

1
6
5
6

.

2011

2012

2013

EBITdA (£M)

£35.4m -7.8% 

40.0

36.0

32.0

28.0

24.0

20.0

3
8
3

.

3
8
4

.

3
5
4

.

2011

2012

2013

oPERATING PRoFIT (£M)

£30.0m -9.1% 

35.0

30.0

25.0

20.0

15.0

10.0

3
3
.
1

3
3
0

.

3
0
0

.

2011

2012

2013

oPERATING PRoFIT MARGIN (%)

16.9% -2.1%pts

20.0

18.0

16.0

14.0

12.0

10.0

2
0
0

.

1
9
0

.

1
6
9

.

2011

2012

2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

23

Brewing & Brands

INVESTMENT IN OUR 
CORE ALE BRANdS
We have maintained our industry-
leading investment in our core ale brands 
during the year, with £4.5m spent on 
national TV advertising campaigns for 
Greene King IPA, Old Speckled Hen and 
Belhaven Best. For quality recognition, 
Greene King IPA Reserve and Greene 
King IPA Gold won Grand Gold and 
Gold awards respectively at the 2013 
Monde Awards.

BUSINESS REVIEW
Financial review

STRONG 
PERFORMANCE

“ Revenue grew by 4.8% driven by growth 
in our Retail business. Profit before tax and 
exceptionals was up 6.6%. Operating cash 
flows were strong and we increased our 
return on capital employed to 8.9%.”

Once again, the benefits of a consistent and 
clear strategy to deliver earnings and dividend 
growth continue to be seen in the performance 
of the group. The highlights are:

 • Revenue up 4.8% to £1,194.7m.

 • Profit before tax and exceptionals up 6.6%.

 • Dividend per share up 7.3%.

 • Reduction in net debt to EBITDA to 4.7x.

 • ROCE up 40bps to 8.9%.

 • New financing in place. 

Results 
Revenue grew by 4.8% to £1,194.7m. The 
biggest driver of this growth came from our 
retail estate, where revenue grew by 7.4% 
and average revenue per pub rose 3.8%. Our 
retail estate now accounts for over 72% of 
group revenue and will continue to grow its 
share as we progress towards our target of 
1,100 retail sites. Total revenue in Pub Partners 
was down 5.5%, while average revenue per 
pub increased by 3.6%. Brewing & Brands 
grew revenue by 2.1%. 

Operating profit before exceptionals was 
£248.2m, up 5.1%, with the group operating 
margin up 10bps to 20.8%, despite the 
changing business mix of the group. Control 
over costs and cash remains strong with the 
retail operating margin growing 80bps to 
19.4%, despite significant cost inflation.

Net interest costs before exceptional items of 
£86.2m were only 2.4% higher than last year, 
as a result of strong cash flow management 
and despite a reduction in the IFRS pension 
interest credit of £1.2m.

Profit before tax and exceptionals was £162.0m, 
an increase of 6.6%. Adjusted earnings per 
share of 57.0p was up 7.5%, benefiting from 
the reduction in the effective tax rate. Statutory 
profit before tax was £114.8m, down 8.2%.

Tax
The effective rate of corporation tax (before 
exceptional items) was 24% compared to 25% 
in the previous year, resulting in a charge to 
operating profits (before exceptional items) 
of £38.9m. This is in line with the standard 
UK corporation tax rate and is expected 
to remain in line. 

However, our full year contribution to 
HM Treasury was much higher with a total 
of £375m in total taxes paid or generated 
(including beer duty, VAT, PAYE etc.). 
This is equivalent to 31% of our turnover 
and is seven times the dividends we paid 
out to our shareholders.

The group’s tax policy, which has been 
approved by the board, is aligned with 
the business strategy. It seeks to protect 
shareholder value by structuring operations 
in a tax efficient manner, while complying 
with all relevant tax laws and legislation, 
and fulfilling our obligations as a 
responsible UK tax payer.

Exceptional items
As set out in note five, we recorded a net 
exceptional charge of £24.8m, consisting 
of a £19.0m charge to operating profit before 
tax, a £28.2m charge to finance costs and 
an exceptional tax credit of £22.4m.

The key items in operating profit were a 
£8.4m credit as a consequence of closure 
of the defined benefit pension schemes to 
future accrual, offset by an impairment 
charge of £17.7m against the carrying value 
of a small number of our pubs, where specific 
market conditions have impacted trading, 
and £6.7m relating to disposals, which 
includes £4.5m of related goodwill.

An exceptional finance cost of £28.2m has 
been recognised in respect of the fair value 
of the interest rate swap no longer qualifying 
for hedge accounting, in anticipation of the 
post year-end repurchase of the AB1 floating 
rate bond.

In addition to a tax credit of £9.0m in respect 
of the above items, the exceptional tax credit 
of £22.4m includes a deferred tax credit of 
£6.1m, arising from the reduction in the rate 
of corporation tax from 24% to 23%, effective 
from 1 April 2013, and a deferred tax credit 
of £7.5m, in respect of the licensed estate. 

Cash flow
Operating cash flows were strong. We 
generated record free cash flow (FCF) of 
£63.1m, up from £38.5m in the previous year, 
and comfortably ahead of our scheduled 
debt repayments of £27.8m.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

25

BUSINESS REVIEW
BUSINESS REVIEW
Financial review continued

Cash flow continued
EBITDA, before exceptional items, was 
£306.5m, up 5.0%, from 4% fewer pubs. 

We disposed of 108 sites as part of our 
strategy to improve the quality of our estate 
with the cash proceeds totalling £28.0m.

As outlined below, we made good progress 
towards our target of growing our retail 
estate to 1,100 sites with a cash outflow on 
acquisitions and acquired sites totalling 
£46.3m, bringing the net cash inflow 
to £42.8m.

Capital expenditure
We again kept constant our level of 
investment in maintaining and developing 
our core estate, as well as investing to grow 
the size of our retail estate. The result is a 
well invested estate with total expenditure 
of £39.7m in the year.

Capital expenditure on the core estate, 
including maintenance capital, was £79.4m, 
compared to £81.3m in the previous year. 
A further £22.6m was invested in acquiring 
single sites, with £23.7m invested on these 
and previously acquired sites.

Looking forward, we have a strong pipeline 
of new retail sites and we are on track to open 
30 new builds and single site acquisitions each 
year, as well as identifying further transfer 
opportunities from the tenanted estate.

Net debt and financing
Net debt at the year end was £1,450.4m, 
a reduction of £42.8m from the previous 
year end, with the key movements being 
positive FCF of £63.1m, disposal proceeds 
of £28.0m and the continued investment in 
growing our retail estate, through new sites, 
of £46.3m.

Our financing strategy is designed to 
ensure we can access sufficiently diversified 
funding sources, maintain sufficient stand-by 
liquidity and mitigate re-financing risk, 
while maintaining an effective total cost 
of borrowing.

The principal element of our funding 
structure is a portfolio of securitised bonds, 
totalling £1,292.7m, with final maturity dates 
ranging from 2021 to 2036. The weighted 
average maturity of these bonds is 14 years. 
During the year, the group made scheduled 
debt repayments of £27.8m.

The group also maintains a revolving credit 
facility, which was £180m drawn at the 
year end.

Since the financial year end, the group has 
renegotiated its revolving credit facility, 
increasing its size from £400m to £460m 
and extending its maturity from April 2016 
to June 2018. At the same time, a group entity 
has purchased the £60m AB1 bond issued by 
the securitisation vehicle. The impact of this 
transaction will help to mitigate the scheduled 
increase in interest costs on the securitised 
debt due to start in June 2013, as well as 
providing further liquidity. 

Our blended cost of debt was 5.9% with 
interest rate hedges in place for 99% of the 
year-end debt at a fixed rate. Going forward 
from June 2013, we expect a blended cost of 
debt of 6.1% after all of the securitised bond 
step-ups and the impact of the re-financing 
outlined above. 

Our overall credit metrics remain strong. 
Fixed charge cover has improved to 2.7x from 
2.6x and interest cover has also improved 
to 2.9x from 2.7x. Annualised net debt to 
EBITDA has reduced to 4.7x and will continue 
to improve as we maximise the annual 
EBITDA returns from the underlying 
business and our investments in new sites. 
Our securitised vehicle had a FCF debt 
service cover ratio of 1.5x at the year end, 
giving 29% headroom.

Return on capital employed
At the year end, our ROCE, on an annualised 
basis, was 8.9%, up from 8.5%. This growth 
is due to strong capital disciplines and 
improvements in the underlying profitability 
of the business, coupled with our stated 
strategy of investing trading cash flows and 
disposal proceeds into expanding our retail 
estate, where we are able to achieve returns 
significantly ahead of our cost of capital.

As we continue to invest and increase the 
number of new retail sites, particularly new 
builds opened each year, the full impact on 
ROCE will not be seen immediately as we 
invest capital ahead of the income stream. 
That said, the returns we are achieving on 
sites opened since 2009 remain very strong 
with a combined EBITDA ROI of 15.0%.

Dividend
The board has recommended a final dividend 
of 19.45 pence per share, up 7.5%. This will 
be paid on 9 September 2013 to shareholders 
on the register at the close of business on 
9 August 2013.

The proposed final dividend brings the 
total dividend for the year to 26.6 pence 
per share, up 7.3%.

This is in line with the board’s policy of 
maintaining a minimum dividend cover 
of two times underlying earnings, while 
continuing to invest for future growth, 
and maintains our long-term track record 
of annual dividend growth.

Pensions
The group maintains a defined contribution 
scheme, which is open to all new employees. 

The group’s three defined benefit schemes are 
all closed to new entrants. During the year, 
the group completed a consultation with the 
remaining active members of the defined 
benefit schemes, resulting in the schemes 
being closed to future accrual and members 
being invited to join the defined contribution 
scheme instead. A net gain of £8.4m has 
been recognised within exceptional items, 
comprising a £10.1m gain, in respect of past 
service accrual, no longer being linked to 
future salary growth, less £1.7m of 
implementation costs.

At the year end, there was an IAS 19 pension 
deficit of £63.8m, which compares to £67.3m 
at the previous year end. The movement is 
primarily driven by the exceptional gain 
following the closure of the scheme to 
future accrual.

Total cash contributions in the period were 
£10.1m for both past and current service.

The triennial valuation for our main pension 
scheme was completed in the year and the 
future annual deficit funding payments will 
reduce to £6.9m from a previous payment 
level of £10.5m. 

Summary
The group has continued to make good 
progress across all of the key financial 
metrics during the year, with both earnings 
and dividend growth, underpinned by 
strong margins and credit metrics, reduced 
leverage and an improving ROCE.

Matthew Fearn
Finance director
26 June 2013

26

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Key performance indicators

AdjustEd EARNINGs 
PER shARE (P)

dIvIdENd PER shARE 
(P)

PBtE 
(£m)

57.0p 

26.6p 

£162.0m 

FREE CAsh FLow
(£m)

£63.1m 

60.0

50.0

40.0

30.0

20.0

5
7
.
0

5
3
0

.

4
8
2

.

4
3
4

.

28.0

24.0

20.0

16.0

12.0

2
6
6

.

2
4
8

.

2
3
.
1

2
1
.
5

170.0

150.0

130.0

110.0

90.0

1
6
2
0

.

1
5
2
0

.

1
4
0
0

.

1
2
3
0

.

80.0

60.0

40.0

20.0

0.0

6
3
.
1

5
1
.
2

4
0
0

.

3
8
5

.

2010

2011

2012

2013

2010

2011

2012

2013

2010

2011

2012

2013

2010

2011

2012

2013

Summary
Strong growth coupled with improving 
trading profit margins and the impact 
of a reduction in the group’s effective 
tax rate have delivered in earnings per 
share growth of 7.5% to 57.0p.

Summary
Following record results, strong growth 
and continued cash generation, the board 
recommend a final dividend payment of 
19.45p per share, 7.5% ahead of last year. 
The total dividend per share for the year 
of 26.6p is 7.3% ahead of last year.

Summary
Profit before tax and exceptionals 
increased by 6.6% to £162.0m. 
Operating profits increased by 5.1% 
with interest costs increasing by 2.4% 
compared to last year.

Summary
Operating cash flows remain strong 
and we generated record free cash flow 
of £63.1m, up from £38.5m in the 
previous year, and comfortably ahead 
of our scheduled debt repayments 
of £27.8m.

Definition
Profit for the period attributable to 
equity holders, excluding the effect 
of exceptional items, divided by the 
weighted average number of shares 
in issue during the period excluding 
own shares held.

Definition
Total dividend per share paid and 
proposed in respect of the period. 

Definition
Group profit for the period after 
financing charges but before tax 
and exceptional items. 

Definition
Free cash flow is the movement in net 
debt due to operating cash flows, after 
interest payments, tax payments, core 
capex and dividends, but excluding 
exceptional items, acquisitions, 
disposals and share movements.

FIxEd ChARGE CovER

REtuRN oN CAPItAL EmPLoyEd
(%)

EBItdA PER sItE: 
GREENE KING REtAIL (£K)

EBItdA PER sItE: 
PuB PARtNERs (£K)

2.7x 

8.9% 

£218.6k 

£57.5k 

.

2
6

.

2
6

2
.
7

2
4

.

3.0

2.5

2.0

1.5

1.0

8
5

.

8
5

.

.

8
9

8
.
1

9.0

8.0

7.0

6.0

5.0

240.0

210.0

180.0

150.0

120.0

2
1
8
6

.

2
0
4
4

.

1
9
3
9

.

1
7
9
2

.

58.0

56.0

54.0

52.0

50.0

5
7
.
5

5
5
2

.

5
3
2

.

5
2
2

.

2010

2011

2012

2013

2010

2011

2012

2013

2010

2011

2012

2013

2010

2011

2012

2013

Summary
Our overall credit metrics remain 
strong with fixed charge cover 
improving to 2.7x from 2.6x last year.

Definition
Fixed charge cover is calculated using 
the formula EBITDAR (operating profit 
before depreciation, amortisation, rent 
and exceptionals) less maintenance 
capex divided by the sum of interest 
and rent. 

Summary
Strong capital disciplines and 
improvements in the underlying 
profitability of the business, coupled with 
our stated strategy of investing trading 
cash flows and disposal proceeds into 
expanding our retail estate have resulted 
in our return on capital employed 
increasing by 0.4%pts to 8.9%.

Definition
Return on capital employed is calculated 
by dividing pre-exceptional operating 
profit by average capital employed 
throughout the year. Capital employed is 
defined as total net assets excluding 
deferred tax balances, derivatives, 
post-employment liabilities and net debt.

Summary
Strong revenue growth and improving 
margins combined with the impact of 
our strategy to improve the size and 
quality of our retail estate have lead to 
Greene King Retail’s EBITDA per site 
growing by 6.9%.

Definition
EBITDA (operating profit before 
depreciation and exceptionals) divided 
by the average number of trading pubs 
in the period.

Summary
Our strategy to reduce the size of the 
Pub Partners estate, improve estate 
quality and increase our offer influence 
has seen EBITDA per site grow by 4.2%.

Definition
EBITDA (operating profit before 
depreciation and exceptionals) divided 
by the average number of trading pubs 
in the period.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

27

BUSINESS REVIEW
Risks and uncertainties 

Greene King has a formal risk management process which is designed to identify, 
assess and prioritise risks within the business, so that their impact on sustainable 
profitability is minimised and the group is able to deliver our business plans 
and strategic objectives, as well as to maximise shareholder returns. 

The board retains ultimate responsibility for 
the company’s risk management framework 
and reviews the group’s principal risks on 
an annual basis. The board has delegated 
responsibility for assurance for the risk 
management process to the audit committee, 
which regularly reviews the risk management 
processes for each division and functional area. 
The implementation of risk management and 
internal control systems is the responsibility 
of the executive directors and other 
senior management.

Each division and functional area is 
responsible for maintaining, reviewing 
and regularly updating a risk register. 
Classification of risks takes into account the 
likelihood of their occurrence and the scale 
of potential impact (both financial and 
reputational) on the business. Each division 
and functional area is then responsible for 
drawing up plans to manage new risks or 
gaps in mitigation plans. Progress of these 
risk implementation plans is monitored by 
senior management on a regular basis. In 
addition, a company-wide risk committee 
reviews the individual risk registers in detail, 

monitors the risk mitigation plans and assists 
in the production of the group risk register. 

Given that some risks are external and not 
fully within our control, the risk management 
processes are designed to manage risks which 
may have a material impact on our business, 
rather than to fully mitigate all risks.

This section highlights some of the key risks 
and uncertainties which affect Greene King, 
but it is not intended to be an exhaustive 
analysis of all risks facing the business.

Strategic risks

SPECIFIC RISK AREAS

PoTENTIAL IMPACT

MITIGATIoN

MoNIToRING/ASSURANCE

To achieve our Retail 
expansion plans we need to be 
able to acquire existing pubs, 
smaller pub businesses and 
brown or greenfield sites on 
which to build new pubs.

A failure to find and secure the 
acquisition (and development where 
appropriate) of top quality sites could 
reduce our rate of growth in the future.

We maintain a pipeline of sites available 
for purchase and a team of acquisition 
managers responsible for securing new 
sites on an on-going basis. Our in-house 
property development team is employed 
to help deliver new-build projects on 
time and on budget.

Regular updates are provided to 
management as to the status of potential 
acquisitions and of development progress 
for new build sites or major conversions 
of acquired pubs. Monthly estate plan 
meetings are held to discuss progress.

The current economic 
situation and fluctuations 
in the UK property market 
may make it more difficult 
to reduce the size of our 
tenanted estate. 

It may be more difficult to dispose of 
properties at an appropriate valuation, 
impacting our ability to reinvest those 
funds elsewhere or service debt. 
This may also lead us to continuing 
operating pubs that are in long-term 
profit decline.

We have an on-going programme 
of investment in our sites, in the form 
of both expansionary and maintenance 
capital. Under-performing sites receive 
additional operational focus through our 
Independence Pub division. Our team of 
estate managers is tasked with achieving 
the sale of proposed disposal sites at the 
best possible prices.

There is regular assessment of the 
long-term value of all of our sites 
by the property department.

We are investing significantly 
in our core ale brands to drive 
core own-brand volume 
growth and UK ale market 
out-performance.

A failure to execute this strategy 
correctly could result in lower or 
stagnant sales growth in those brands, 
affecting profitability.

This year we have invested £7.3m in 
marketing relating to our beers, with 
national TV advertising campaigns for 
Greene King IPA, Old Speckled Hen 
and Belhaven Best.

The Brewing & Brands executive team 
reviews and approves brand investment 
proposals, monitors customer opinions 
and is tasked with turning increased 
investment into increased sales.

28

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Economic and market risks

SPECIFIC RISK AREAS

PoTENTIAL IMPACT

MITIGATIoN

MoNIToRING/ASSURANCE

The wider economic situation 
within the UK affects consumer 
confidence, with a consequential 
impact on levels of consumer 
spending in our pubs and those 
of our tenants and lessees. 
We also face increasing 
competitor activity.

A prolonged recession or delay in 
economic recovery, or significant 
competitor activity, could reduce our 
revenue and lead to lower growth rates. 
More tenant defaults and business 
failures could also reduce revenue and 
increase costs in the form of tenant 
support or recruiting new licensees.

Inflationary trends increase 
the costs of our key products, 
including food, drink and site 
services including utilities. 

Higher costs could impact margins 
and lead to reduced profitability.

By focusing on value, service and quality 
we aim to continue to appeal to a broad 
range of consumers. We have a wide 
geographic spread of pubs including the 
more affluent areas of London and the 
South East, and a good range of customer 
offers. For our tenants and lessees we 
provide on-going training, operational 
and financial support alongside continued 
agreement innovation to ensure that 
more of our tenants are able to run 
profitable businesses.

The executive teams and the board receive 
regular updates on performance. 
Competitor activity is monitored at both 
a strategic and tactical level to enable 
suitable actions to be developed in 
response. All business units keep and 
update profit protection plans in case 
of any downturn in trading conditions. 
Our Pub Partners division constantly 
monitors the vital signs of our licensee 
health, including debt levels and the 
numbers of tenancies at will.

We have contracts in place with major 
suppliers designed to protect us against 
significant increases in major cost items 
and against price volatility. We continually 
evolve the composition of menus and 
retail prices to optimise value to the 
customer and profits for the company.

All costs, including labour, are closely 
monitored by the executive teams 
to ensure that they remain in line 
with budget.

Operational and people risks

SPECIFIC RISK AREAS

PoTENTIAL IMPACT

MITIGATIoN

MoNIToRING/ASSURANCE

An event or series of events 
(including poor service standards 
and food provenance issues) may 
occur which damages our brand 
in the eyes of our customers, 
particularly in the age of 
increasing use of social media.

Customers may stop visiting our sites 
or visit less frequently, leading to a loss 
of revenue and reputational damage.

We maintain tight controls (including with 
regard to food provenance) to protect 
and enhance our reputation and brand 
values, alongside staff training, targeted 
investment programmes and mystery 
guest visits. Incident escalation and 
management systems are also in place. 

Mystery guest scores are regularly 
measured and reviewed by the relevant 
executive teams in our Retail divisions. 
We have introduced a new supplier 
assurance programme to enable us 
to give appropriate assurances to 
our customers as to the provenance 
of the food in our pubs.

We are reliant on information 
systems and technology for many 
aspects of our business.

A lengthy failure of any such systems, 
howsoever caused, could impact our 
ability to do business and cause 
reputational damage.

Our networks are protected by firewalls 
and anti-virus protection systems and 
back-up procedures are also in place. 
A business continuity plan is in place 
for critical business processes. We have 
access to an off-site disaster recovery 
facility in the event of a major issue 
with our head office or our systems.

The IT department constantly monitor 
threats to data protection by viruses, 
hacking and breach of access controls. 
The business continuity plan is also 
regularly reviewed and tested.

We are reliant on a number of 
key suppliers and third party 
distributors to supply our pubs 
and restaurants and are also at 
risk of an event occurring which 
may prevent us from producing, 
packaging and distributing our 
own beers.

We are reliant on the quality of 
our employees and our licensees.

Supply disruption (whether of our own 
beers or any third party products) could 
impact customer satisfaction. Additionally 
a key supplier or distributor failure 
could over the longer term reduce our 
revenue or lead to increased costs if 
alternative arrangements are required.

Detailed risk management and mitigation 
plans exist in our internal production 
and distribution activities. Our key 
suppliers are expected to maintain 
disaster recovery plans. We also maintain 
back-up plans in the event of the failure 
by or loss of a key supplier.

Risk mitigation and product recall plans 
are reviewed and tested regularly across 
the business and disaster recovery plans 
of suppliers are reviewed regularly. The 
financial stability of key suppliers that 
we regard as most at risk is monitored 
with the help of external advisers. 

A failure to attract, develop, retain and 
motivate the best employees at all levels 
of the organisation and the best tenants 
may mean that we are not able to execute 
our business plans and strategy.

We aim to recruit the best people and offer 
training and development programmes to 
ensure that we retain them. Remuneration 
packages are benchmarked to ensure that 
they remain competitive. The range of 
tenancy agreements, training programmes 
and support available is designed to attract 
and retain the best quality licensees.

Our annual employee engagement 
survey is used to obtain direct feedback 
from employees on a range of issues. 
Both staff and licensee turnover is 
measured and reviewed by relevant 
management teams.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

29

BUSINESS REVIEW
Risks and uncertainties continued

Regulatory risks

SPECIFIC RISK AREAS

PoTENTIAL IMPACT

MITIGATIoN

MoNIToRING/ASSURANCE

A new stautory code could increase 
costs for Pub Partners and reduce 
revenue. Additional taxation or further 
changes to laws on the sale of alcohol 
could lead to both reduced revenue and 
increased costs across the group.

The government is currently 
consulting on a statutory code 
to manage the relationship 
between pub companies and 
their tenants which could have 
significant implications for 
our Pub Partners division. 
There is also a risk of further 
legislative changes in relation 
to alcohol and licensing.

We are required to comply 
with a wide range of health 
and safety legislation, including 
in the areas of food safety and 
fire safety, across all parts 
of our business.

A major food safety or health and safety 
incident which causes serious illness, 
injury or even loss of life to one of our 
customers, employees or tenants 
could have a significant impact 
on our reputation.

We have responded to the recent 
government consultation in relation to the 
proposed statutory code and will continue 
to engage actively with government to 
argue for more time to be given for the 
self-regulatory code to prove its worth. 
We also aim to ensure that government 
appreciates that the safest and most 
responsible place to consume alcohol 
is in a well-managed licensed 
on-trade premises. 

We have a comprehensive range of 
formally documented policies and 
procedures in place to ensure compliance 
with current legislation and approved 
guidance in this area, as well as our own 
high standards. Our health and safety 
policies have been reviewed by our 
primary authority partner, Reading 
Borough Council, which has rated our 
safety management systems as very 
good. Safety levels for new tenants have 
been improved, and safety measures are 
in place to ensure that product integrity 
is maintained and that all food and 
drink products are fully traceable.

The regulatory landscape is monitored 
on an on-going basis by our public 
affairs team, so we remain aware of any 
potential changes which may adversely 
impact our business.

We have a centrally managed system 
of compliance tracking (KPIs), which 
is validated by both internal and 
independent external audits carried out 
at all Retail sites to measure performance 
against certain strict health and safety 
standards including food safety and fire 
safety. Operational managers are regularly 
briefed on performance and remedial 
actions are tracked from the centre.

Financial risks

SPECIFIC RISK AREAS

PoTENTIAL IMPACT

MITIGATIoN

MoNIToRING/ASSURANCE

Our financing structure requires 
us to be able to repay capital 
borrowed and interest on 
time and to ensure that we 
operate within certain 
financial covenants.

Breaching our financial covenants would 
have a significant impact on our ability to 
pay dividends or reinvest cash back into 
the business. It could also impact our 
reputation and on-going creditworthiness.

Our long-term strategy and yearly 
business plans are formulated to ensure 
that financial covenants can be met. Our 
securitised vehicle had a free cash flow 
debt service cover ratio at the year end 
of 1.5x, giving 29% headroom. Under our 
bank facility we had 135% headroom on 
the key net debt/EBITDA covenant.

We regularly monitor our performance 
against our financial covenants, including 
stress-testing. Working capital is carefully 
forecast, regularly reviewed by the 
finance teams and closely managed.

Inadequate internal control systems 
increase the risk of fraud being perpetrated 
against us. Non-compliance with statutory 
obligations or a material mis-statement 
in the reported results of the company 
could damage our reputation.

Our systems of internal control, more 
details of which appear on page 45, 
include robust controls, appropriately 
qualified staff, segregation of duties and 
authority levels for expenditure and 
payments. Appropriate advice is taken 
to ensure relevant statutory compliance. 

Regular management accounts are 
produced for each area and reviewed 
in detail, to enable irregularities to be 
exposed. There is a detailed external 
audit of our statutory accounts. 

The difference in value between the 
schemes’ assets and liabilities may vary, 
resulting in an increased deficit being 
recognised on our balance sheet. 
The volatility of this deficit makes 
longer-term planning more difficult.

All the schemes are now closed to 
future accrual to reduce volatility.

There is regular monitoring of the 
schemes’ investments and dialogue 
with the trustees on an on-going basis 
regarding funding requirements.

We are reliant on maintaining 
robust systems of internal 
control to deal accurately 
with the large numbers of 
transactions undertaken by 
the business and to ensure 
compliance with statutory 
obligations particularly 
with regard to taxation.

We maintain three defined 
benefit pension schemes 
which must be funded to meet 
the required benefit payments. 
The value and funding of the 
schemes are subject to the risk 
of changes in life expectancy, 
actual and expected price 
inflation and changes in 
investment yields.

30

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Corporate social responsibility

SUPPoRTING 
CoMMUNITIES 
ANd CHARITIES
We are proud to report that last year 
we donated over £416,000 for causes 
close to our hearts. We recognise the 
importance of the communities in which 
we operate, and we work in partnership 
with national charity Macmillan 
Cancer Support, and with Focus 12, 
an independent charity based near our 
head office in Bury St Edmunds. We also 
support local charities across the UK, 
which our employees most care about, 
by facilitating their giving in a variety 
of ways including product donations, 
payroll giving and volunteering. 

BUSINESS REVIEW
Corporate social responsibility

As the leading UK pub retailer and 
brewer, it is vital that we operate a 
sustainable and responsible business. 
We take the maintenance and delivery 
of an effective social responsibility 
programme very seriously. 

Our focus
This year, our focus is on our impact 
on four key stakeholder areas: our 
customers, our communities, people 
and our environment. We continue to 
make good progress in our corporate 
social responsibility (CSR) goals and 
for next year we have set even more 
challenging targets. Details of our CSR 
policies and practices can be found in 
the social responsibility section of our 
website www.greeneking.co.uk. 

oUR CUSToMERS

Pubs continue to play a vital role for 
customers, families and communities 
across the UK and provide safe, affordable 
hospitality, especially in this difficult 
financial environment.

Our commitment to delivering industry-
leading value, service and quality to our 
customers is supported by our strong retail 
brands and innovation, which drives us to 
deliver the best experience possible for 
our customers.

Food authenticity – 
horsemeat scandal 
We know how important it is that our 
customers can trust the food that they 
eat in our pubs, hotels and restaurants. 
As soon as we heard the news of mislabelling 
of meat products, in addition to the strict 
tests already carried out on our supply 
chain, we immediately began a series 
of additional DNA tests. 

The horsemeat scandal highlighted the 
need for changes within the global food 
supply chain to enable customers to eat with 
confidence. All of our meat is from fully 
traceable sources and our customers can be 
assured that we take the quality of the food 
we serve very seriously. Greene King has 
always had robust measures in place to 
ensure that our suppliers and products meet 
our exacting standards and we were pleased 
to be in a position to reassure our customers 
that no horse meat was found in any of our 
dishes following a full programme of tests. 

We will not become complacent and we are 
introducing additional measures to ensure 
the on-going integrity and quality of our 
products. We have engaged an international 
risk assessment specialist company to carry 
out a full risk assessment of our suppliers to 
determine integrity and traceability, including 

checks all the way back to the raw ingredients 
of every dish. We are also implementing a 
new system for the management of our 
menu specifications.

Healthy eating 
This year we have increased our range 
of healthier dishes in our Premium Local 
pubs. These include broad bean risotto, 
bulgar wheat salad, skinny burger, oven 
baked fishcakes, haricot bean dip, vitality 
salad and frozen yoghurt. In conjunction 
with this, we have also expanded our range 
of super food salads across our menus, 
incorporating ingredients such as pomegranate 
and avocado, which are key indicators 
for healthier food choices. 

Our lower calorie menu sections have now 
been extended to our Old English Inns (OEI) 
and Eating Inn menus, offering an increased 
range of healthier dishes. With lunchtime 
being an important dining occasion, we have 
also introduced a gluten-free bread option 
into OEI, Eating Inn and our mainstream 
high street menus. This has been received 
well, with 2% of our mainstream high street 
customers choosing this as an option. 

As part of our on-going commitment to 
reduce the levels of salt within our supply 
chain, we have made further progress in 
meeting the government’s 2012 salt targets 
and are continuing to review our products 
in line with the current recommendations. 
This year we have already seen a 7% reduction 
in the levels of salt in back bacon across 
our estate. 

Stay safe with Safe Start 
Last year saw the introduction of a new Safe 
Start initiative in our leased and tenanted 
division. The Safe Start pack comprises a 
complete set of statutory tests including gas, 

electricity and fire safety, which are carried 
out before the new licensee takes over the 
pub. Licensees are now also required to 
pass an online Safe Start exam before 
taking on a pub. 

This is now an embedded behaviour across 
our leased and tenanted estate and continues 
to be an essential part of our letting procedure 
with 409 new tenants undertaking the online 
training and benefiting from the complete 
set of statutory checks during the year. The 
Belhaven estate was successfully integrated 
into the same process during the year.

Quality standards for our beers
Our Bury St Edmunds brewery site has been 
awarded the highest quality grade for the 
third consecutive year of unannounced 
audits with the British Retail Consortium. 
Our Belhaven brewery also has a similar 
level of award with pre planned visits. This 
award confirms that our beer is produced to 
the highest quality and food safety standards.

We have introduced new quality measures 
to track quality in glass with cellar inspections, 
beer tasting for customers, as well as 
customer feedback surveys. 

Responsible retailing
We strive to ensure that alcohol produced 
or sold by Greene King is consumed 
responsibly. Greene King has invested in, 
launched and maintains the website  
http://enjoyresponsibly.co.uk/. This was 
created to offer free and practical advice on 
all aspects of alcohol use, with guidance on 
health safety levels and even has practical 
advice on where to go for support for people 
who feel they have a problem with alcohol. 
The Enjoy Responsibly logo is on all our 
bottles and cans.

32

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

oUR CUSToMERS continued

Responsible retailing continued
Our promotional materials carry clear 
and concise messages encouraging sensible 
drinking and all our bottles, cans and outer 
packaging specify the number of units of 
alcohol in them, the NHS guidelines and the 
drinking whilst pregnant advisory logo. 

Greene King also supports the principles 
laid out in the Portman Code of Practice 
on responsible retailing of alcohol. All retail 
managers and our bar staff are trained upon 
recruitment and on-going to ensure they 
understand their role in promoting the 
responsible consumption of alcohol by 
our customers. 

Tackling under-age sales
All of our directly managed premises operate 
‘challenge 21’ or ‘challenge 25’ programmes 
and free of charge notices are available to all 
of our premises. Our premises are regularly 
audited both in-house and externally to ensure 
that notices are displayed in prominent 
positions advising customers that a ‘challenge 
21’ or ‘challenge 25’ policy is in force.

Best Bar None and Pub Watch schemes
172 of our managed pubs belong to recognised 
Pub Watch schemes and a further 42 have 
or are currently signed up to Best Bar None 
award schemes, with an additional 32 awaiting 
schemes currently on hold to commence. 

Last year, 18 of our pubs were accredited 
with Best Bar None status, some of whom 
were awarded best in specific categories. 
Teams at the Blue Anchor, Aintree and 
Rudds Arms, Middlesborough were Best 
Pub Runners-up within their individual 
schemes. The Frog & Parrot and Museum, 
Sheffield both received a Distinction for 
their efforts. Baldwins, Great Barr won 
Best Suburban Bar and The Turf Tavern 
in Carlisle won the overall Best Pub award 
in their scheme.

oUR CoMMUNITIES

Stephen Hammond MP (right), Department for Transport’s minister for road safety 
with Greene King house manager, Kieron Murphy, at the Mason’s Arms Pub, London W1 
for the launch of the Designated Driver Campaign.

Limit awareness
We support the government’s anti-drink 
drive Christmas campaigns. In 2011 and 
2012, we also supported the Designated 
Driver Christmas Campaign in conjunction 
with Coca-Cola Enterprises Limited, 
throughout our managed pubs estate, where 
we offered free soft drinks at Christmas 
for designated drivers. 

Minimum unit pricing for alcohol
In order to tackle the misuse of alcohol, which 
causes ill health and can lead to anti-social 
behaviour within communities, Greene King 
has long advocated the need for a minimum 
unit price (MUP) for alcohol, throughout the 
UK, as a targeted approach to tackle the easy 
availability of cheap alcohol in the off-trade. 
This, plus a range of associated measures, such 
as better alcohol-education for adults and 
children, and a ban on multi-buy deals, are 
essential for the future health and wellbeing 
of our society.

This year, Greene King established and 
led a coalition of similarly minded industry 
stakeholders who have called on the UK 
government to remain committed to its 
stated aim to introduce MUP. 

Not only could such a step significantly 
improve public health, it would also 
reinforce the family experience, which our 
pubs and restaurants aim to create, quite 
apart from the broader societal benefits.

Public Health Responsibility 
Deal – progress on our pledges
Over the last year, our focus has centred 
on a number of priorities including pledges 
made in connection with the government’s 
Public Health Responsibility Deal (PHRD). 
The PHRD taps into our potential to 
make a significant contribution by taking 
a collaborative approach to tackling the 
challenges caused by lifestyle choices. Details 
of our signed pledges and our progress is set 
out on the Department of Health, PHRD 
website: https://responsibilitydeal.dh.gov.uk/.

Local communities are fundamental to 
the UK’s unique identity and, within such 
communities local pubs play a vital and 
central role. They are, quite literally, the 
hub of the community and the place where 
everyone comes together to relax and to 
discuss issues that affect that community. 

Greene King recognises the value of that 
role within the social fabric of our society 
and how, for everyone, maintaining the 
presence of a pub in a community is essential. 
Beyond that core social role, but linked to it, 
Greene King has developed a programme to 

support key organisations that address the 
inequalities in our society.

Pub is the Hub
This year, we extended our community 
support by providing £15,000 of central 
funding to ‘Pub is the Hub’. This is a 
not-for-profit organisation offering 
independent, specialist advice on rural 
services diversification or community 
ownership of pubs, so they can continue 
to provide viable local services at the 
heart of the community.

Our funding supports Pub is the Hub’s 
‘Community Services Fund’, established 
in April 2013 to help UK pubs to diversify 
into new services provision for their 
own communities. 

With its track record of rural project 
development and delivery over the last 
ten years, Pub is The Hub has worked with 
licensees to open 100 post offices, 125 shops, 
30 computer training centres, provision for 
allotments, play areas, libraries, school meals, 
local cinemas, and in the region of 30 pubs 
being run by their own local community.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

33

BUSINESS REVIEW
Corporate social responsibility continued 

oUR CoMMUNITIES continued

Macmillan Cancer Support
In May 2012, Greene King launched its first 
national charity partnership, committing 
to raise £1m, over three years, for Macmillan 
Cancer Support. Thanks to the enthusiasm 
and support of our employees and our 
customers across the business, we have 
already raised £300,000 in our first year. 

This great cause has united our customers 
and employees and we have been overwhelmed 
by the enthusiasm for the partnership, the 
goodwill, and the contribution we are 
demonstrating within our local communities 
and we are confident we will attain our 
long-term objective.

By supporting Macmillan’s World’s Biggest 
Coffee Morning on Friday 28 September, 
not only did we raise over £100,000, we 
also saw a growth in sales and footfall over 
that period. This is a clear example of the 
mutual benefit both parties enjoy from 
our partnership... apart from the fun such 
initiatives bring to our communities.

Our colleagues have, unsurprisingly, proven 
themselves to be enthusiastic and creative. 
Examples of ideas from our teams include the 
offer to ale fans of a new and limited edition ale 
Caritas (Latin for charity), with 5p from every 
pint sold donated to Macmillan. We have been 
selling ‘Not alone’ wristbands; six of our gutsy 
employees ran in the London Marathon and 
there has been a plethora of other activities 
across the group as employees and customers 
have embraced the programme.

Lynda Thomas, director of fundraising, 
Macmillan Cancer Support, said: ‘A huge 
thank you to all Greene King staff and 
customers for the wonderful support they 
have given Macmillan during the first year 
of our partnership. Raising £300,000 is a 
fantastic achievement, and will go a long 
way towards helping Macmillan support 

Macmillan’s World’s Biggest Coffee Morning.

people affected by cancer, ensuring that 
no one has to face cancer alone. As the £1m 
target gets closer, I am looking forward 
to the next exciting and successful year 
working together.’ 

In our first year, we have laid the foundations 
for a truly successful partnership. With the 
money our teams have raised, we are helping 
Macmillan to provide practical, emotional, 
financial and medical support to people 
diagnosed with cancer, and their families.

Community outreach
As part of Loch Fyne Restaurants’ 
community outreach initiative to build 
closer links with local communities, 
Loch Fyne in Guildford and in Loughton 
have been hosting class visits from local 
schools. Children are taught about the 
importance of health and hygiene, general 
fish facts and they also get the chance to 
have a go at cooking.

Focus 12
Greene King continues to support the work 
of the charity, Focus 12, based close to our 
head office and brewery in Bury St Edmunds, 
Suffolk. Focus 12 provides treatment for 
clients with drugs and alcohol dependency, 
as well as guidance and counselling for 
affected family members. 

In May, the Greene King Charity ball raised 
over £20,000 for Focus 12, thereby enabling 
them to continue to support the local 
community and tackle the effects of alcohol 
and drug abuse. 

Focus 12’s chief executive, Chip Somers, said: 
‘We are always grateful for any fundraising 
but feel especially that Greene King has taken 
a brave stance in supporting a charity such 
as ours. The money raised will enable at least 
five people to go through the three-month 
programme which will hopefully change the 
lives of them and all their family members.’

Case study – raising funds for Macmillan

To mark the opening of our 200th Hungry 
Horse pub, The Royal Horse, Leamington 
Spa, in May, we challenged our Hungry 
Horse pubs to each raise a minimum of £200 
for Macmillan Cancer Support, through a 
number of fundraising activities.

34

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

oUR PEoPLE

Our people are our lifeblood and our 
greatest asset. With over 22,000 employees, 
it is vital that we attract and retain the best 
people and developing and nurturing talent 
is essential to our continued success and the 
future growth of our business. 

Employee engagement
We take very seriously the engagement 
and wellbeing of our employees. Last year 
we set ourselves a challenge to improve on 
our employee engagement, demonstrated by 
our annual attitude survey. We were pleased 
that not only did we see an improvement, 
from 71% to 75%, but we also achieved that 
score with a response rate of 85%, representing 
some 18,000 people and a 20% increase in 
responses on our last full survey.

for improvement and we will be taking 
these forward.

Alcohol education 
As part of our programme to support 
and educate our employees, we are working 
on a programme to develop and implement 
alcohol education for our 22,000 employees, 
to ensure a full understanding of how to enjoy 
alcohol responsibly and to offer advice on the 
dangers of over-consumption/binge drinking 
and the impact it has on our health and our 
lives. This education training will be rolled out 
in personal meetings with management and via 
on-line training tools. As part of the training, 
we will also reinforce Greene King’s policy 
towards alcohol and responsible consumption.

We will use the data collected to improve 
the business and our working lives. The 
survey results identified specific areas 

Health and safety awards
Once again, we continued our good record 
of receiving awards for our health and safety 

Case study – Apprenticeships

Greene King apprentices Alister Halbert, 17, 
(pictured right) and Kevin Davis, 38, from 
Loch Fyne, Shrewsbury helped the Deputy 
Prime Minister launch a new campaign to 
celebrate the productivity of apprentices 
during National Apprenticeship Week, at 
an evening event in London in March 2013.

Alister and Kevin were undergoing kitchen 
skills training and were chosen as two of four 
Greene King apprentices to make canapés 
for the event at Admiralty House in London, 
as the Deputy Prime Minister Nick Clegg 
officially launched the ‘made by apprentices’ 
campaign to showcase the talents of 
apprentices across the UK.

Talking about his experience, Alister, 
who has since transferred to a professional 
cookery apprenticeship, said: ‘When I 
started my training with Greene King 
I never imagined it would take me so far. 
Bringing the skills I have learnt through 

my apprenticeship to such a high profile 
event has shown me just how far the right 
training really can take you.’

Deputy Prime Minister, Nick Clegg, said: 
‘Apprentices not only make an invaluable 
contribution to their employer, but to the 
economy as a whole.’

Case study – Developing management talent

As part of our commitment to develop 
from within, 12 of our Business 
Development Managers (BDM), who 
studied for a post-graduate degree in 
Multi-Unit Leadership and Strategy 
at Birmingham City University, have 
graduated. With a focus on multi-site 
leadership and retail management, the 
programme takes a year to complete and 
was developed exclusively for Greene King. 

Twenty-six managers have now completed 
this qualification, with four completing 
a Masters degree. 

practices in our Brewing & Brands division:

 •  Greene King awarded Gold Medal for 

Occupational Health and Safety from RoSPA 
(Royal Society for the Prevention of 
Accidents) – ninth consecutive gold award.

 •  Achieved Silver award for MORR 

(Management of Road Risk).

Developing our talent
Greene King recognises the wider benefits 
of developing internal talent and career 
paths that support increased employee 
retention, employee engagement and 
provide long-term career opportunities.

Apprenticeships
As a leader in hospitality, employing over 
22,000 people across the UK, it is important 
to us that we attract, train and retain the 
very best people. 

Greene King signed up to the government’s 
apprenticeship scheme in February 2011, 
leading with Level 2 NVQ qualifications that 
are available to all employees as part of a wider 
employee development framework. The aim is 
to support genuine career opportunities and 
learning from entry-level part-time members 
of staff to area management, and culminating 
in degree level learning with Birmingham 
City University. 

To date, over 3,000 Greene King employees 
from across our business have joined the 
apprenticeship programme, with 1,587 
completing their training. Our apprenticeships 
programme is providing job opportunities 
in local communities, and, where Greene King 
is acquiring, refurbishing or building new 
businesses, new jobs are also being created, 
as we work closely with Job Centre Plus to 
provide opportunities through pre-employment 
training for the long-term unemployed 
and youth unemployment.

Support for our tenants
Greene King has been helping people to run 
their own pubs for over 200 years. The level 
of support we provide for our tenants and 
lessees is central to attracting the best 
licensees for our pubs. 

Our support is tailored to meet the individual 
needs of our licensees from industry-leading 
training for them and their staff, to online 
business support providing easy access from 
a wide range of marketing support, all of 
which is underpinned by our professionally 
qualified BDMs, who work to ensure every 
licensee is making the most of their business.

Licensee profiling
This year Pub Partners introduced a licensee 
profiling tool to assist us with our licensee 
recruitment, helping to ensure we recruit 
the right person for the right pub.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

35

BUSINESS REVIEW
Corporate social responsibility continued 

oUR ENVIRoNMENT

We are committed to reducing the 
environmental impact of our business 
wherever we can, and focus, in particular, 
on energy and water consumption and on the 
amount of waste produced by the business.

Overall use of both gas and electricity 
increased during the year, driven primarily 
by the cold winter and especially cold spring, 
which meant that the heating was kept on in 
our pubs, restaurants and hotels for much 
longer than anticipated. Carbon emissions 
from vehicles also increased, although we 
have improved our record keeping in this 
area during the year and have more accurate 
data than we did last year. As a result, the 
ratio of CO2 emissions to £100k of revenue 
in our Retail and Brewing & Brands divisions 
increased to 14.9 tonnes. 

Work continued throughout the year to 
improve our energy efficiency. 34 sites had 
voltage optimisers installed, while 16 sites 
were fully fitted with LED lighting. We 
installed new cellar cooling systems in 
30 sites, using outside air to cool ground 
level cellars, in a system designed by our 
own cellar service team. We also installed 
new boilers in 45 sites during the year and 
reduced the emissions from our boilers in 
the Bury St Edmunds brewery by over 10%. 

Although water usage was up during the 
year, we now have water monitors installed 
in 15% of sites, doubling the number we had 
last year and giving data on the daily usage of 
water so we can detect higher than average 
usage and leakages much more quickly. 
We continue to work closely with water 

companies to encourage them to help us in 
this area as more accurate records are vital 
to us. 

We also worked hard to reduce waste across 
the business, and the amount of waste that was 
recycled increased by 25% during the year. 
We now have 220 pubs, restaurants and hotels 
that divert all of their waste away from landfill, 
while 74% of our sites are diverting at least 
80% of their waste away from landfill. An 
additional 42% more cooking oil was recycled 
during the year, and in our brewing business, 
over 2,800 tonnes of spent yeast was sent to 
Marmite. As signatories to the voluntary 
Food Service and Hospitality Agreement, we 
have worked closely with WRAP on a number 
of initiatives to reduce food waste, optimise 
packaging and increase recycling rates.

Environmental data

Energy

Natural gas
Other fossil fuels
Electricity

Energy for operations
Vehicles

Total energy (vehicles and operations)
Total CO2 emissions
Water consumption

Units

2011/12

2012/13

Difference

% change

MWh
MWh
MWh

MWh
MWh

 197,333 
 24,920 
 178,174 

 229,706 
 28,409 
 186,155 

 400,427 
 31,099 

 444,270 
 36,868 

MWh
Tonnes

 431,526 
 143,389 

 481,138 
 155,423 

 32,373 
 3,489 
 7,981 

 43,843 
 5,769 

 49,612 
 12,034 

Cubic metres

 2,311,467  2,438,169 

 126,702 

16%
14%
4%

11%
19%

11%
8%

5%

36

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Our priorities for 2013/14

Food assurance

In July 2013, we will appoint a technical and quality manager within our food buying 
team, to review our current reporting and measurement of quality and to make 
recommendations on areas for improvement and to monitor implementation. 

Healthy eating

This year we will continue our focus on healthy eating and will work on developing more 
lower calorie and healthier options for our customers. We will also ensure all of our menus 
indicate lower calorie dishes. We are also planning to trial full calorie labelling on our 
Eating Inn core menus.

Salt targets

This year we will be looking at reducing salt on gammon, which will impact positively on 
our top ten dishes. With technical solutions currently being a focus point for manufacturers, 
we anticipate that salt levels will continue to improve. 

Responsible retailing

We will extend our support in local communities for schemes to address issues around 
social and health harms, and will act together to improve joined up working between 
schemes operating in local areas. We are investigating the possibility of participating 
in a Suffolk-wide Best Bar None scheme next year.

Charitable support

We will continue to organise activities across the business to raise £1m for Macmillan 
Cancer Support by May 2015. We will also support our businesses in their local charitable 
fundraising activities for causes close to their hearts.

Community pubs 
support

We will continue to help UK pubs to diversify into new services provision for their 
own communities.

Improve employee 
engagement

When we next conduct our employee engagement survey we aim to achieve an improvement 
in employee engagement to achieve even more engagement across our teams.

Apprenticeships

We will link apprenticeships to the career ladder, drive catering-led apprenticeships, 
introduce pre-employment training (particularly in our new-build sites), further develop 
apprenticeships across the rest of our business, introduce innovative learning methods, 
and maintain a base of 10% of employees completing apprenticeships.

Health and safety

We will continue to strive to identify and reduce health and safety risks and to improve 
the safety of our premises.

Macmillan – a two-way 
partnership

A natural progression of our partnership with Macmillan Cancer Support is to embed 
their cancer awareness services among our employees and roll out a programme 
of cancer awareness throughout Greene King.

Alcohol education 

While we have had an alcohol policy for some time, and we support treatment 
for employees who have dependency issues, in the coming year we will focus on 
implementing alcohol education and awareness, to help prevent issues occurring 
and to highlight the impact of over-indulgence in alcohol.

Reduce CO2

We will aim to reduce CO2 emissions in our existing estate and specifically aim to improve the 
ratio of CO2 emissions to revenue in our Retail and Brewing & Brands divisions to around 
14.4 tonnes. We will continue to install energy saving systems in our Retail estate and propose 
to move the main boilers in the Bury St Edmunds brewery from light fuel oil to gas.

Reduce water usage

Our focus this year will be on continuing to introduce more water monitors across the estate, 
with a view to having around 30% of the estate fitted with them by the end of this financial year.

Reduce waste

We will continue to aim for improvements in our waste recycling programme during the 
year, with a view to increasing the amount of waste not being sent to landfill, and for even 
more of our pubs, restaurants and hotels to divert all of their waste away from landfill.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

37

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Board of directors

Tim Bridge, DL (64)
Chairman
Appointed in 2005 
( joined the board in 1977)

N

Having joined Greene King in 
1970 Tim Bridge was appointed 
to the board in 1977. He held 
a variety of positions within 
the group, becoming managing 
director in 1990 and chief 
executive in 1994. In 2005 
he stepped down as chief 
executive to take over the 
role of chairman.

Matthew Fearn (48)
Finance director
Appointed in 2011

Matthew Fearn joined 
Greene King in 2011 from 
Brakes Group where he 
was Chief Financial Officer. 
Matthew previously gained 
extensive finance experience 
in the leisure sector with 
De Vere Group plc and 
Whitbread plc. Matthew 
is a member of the ICAEW.

Mike Coupe (52)
Non‑executive director
Appointed in 2011

N

A

With current experience 
gained as an executive 
director on the board of a 
premium, listed company, 
Mike Coupe also brings 
knowledge of a large, 
multi‑site retail organisation 
developed through his role 
as group commercial director 
at J Sainsbury plc.

Lynne Weedall (46)
Non‑executive director
Appointed in October 2012

N

R

Lynne Weedall is currently 
group HR and strategy 
director for The Carphone 
Warehouse Group plc and 
brings to the board a wealth 
of experience of HR and 
organisational development 
gained from a variety of roles 
in the retail sector.

Rooney Anand (49)
Chief executive
Appointed in 2005 
(joined the board in 2001)

Rooney Anand joined the 
group as managing director of 
the brewing division and was 
promoted to chief executive 
in 2005. He was previously 
president and managing director 
of the UK bakery division at 
Sara Lee, the international 
consumer goods business, and, 
prior to that, at United Biscuits.

John Brady (61)
Non‑executive director
Appointed in 2005

N

R

A

Having been a director of 
McKinsey and Company, the 
management consulting firm, 
until 2004 with experience in 
European retail and marketing, 
John Brady brings an extensive 
background in strategy 
development to the board. 
John is also a non‑executive 
director of Aegis Plc.

Ian Durant (54)
Senior independent 
non‑executive director
Appointed in 2007

N

R

A

As a former finance director 
at Intu Properties PLC, 
Ian Durant contributes 
extensive financial experience 
to the Greene King board. 
Ian is also the chairman of 
Capital & Counties Properties 
PLC and Greggs plc and a 
non‑executive director of 
Home Retail Group PLC.

Key of committees

N

R

A

Nomination committee

Remuneration committee

Audit committee

38

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Senior management

Jonathan Webster (51)
Managing director 
Destination Pubs 
In role since 2007

Having worked for more than 
25 years in the pub and leisure 
sector, Jonathan Webster 
brings extensive experience 
and knowledge to the senior 
management team. Jonathan 
joined Greene King with the 
acquisition of Hardys & 
Hansons plc, where he 
was chief executive.

Richard Lewis (42)
Managing director 
Local Pubs 
In role since 2011

Richard Lewis joined Greene 
King from The Warehouse, 
as COO of New Zealand’s 
largest non‑food retailer. 
He has developed a career in 
retailing through roles within 
the Kingfisher Group before 
moving into food retailing 
with Sainsbury’s.

Simon Longbottom (42)
Managing director 
Pub Partners
In role since 2010

Having joined Greene King 
from Gala Coral where he 
was managing director of 
the gaming division and after 
senior positions at Mill House 
Inns and Mitchells & Butlers, 
Simon Longbottom 
contributes 15 years’ 
experience in the sector.

Chris Houlton (50)
Managing director 
Brewing & Brands 
In role since January 2013

Chris Houlton joined Greene 
King from Carlsberg UK 
where he had spent 14 years, 
most recently as sales and 
distribution director. Chris 
brings with him extensive 
experience in both on and off 
trade sales, retail and logistics.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

39

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Corporate governance statement

Statement of compliance with the 
UK Corporate Governance Code
The company is subject to the UK 
Corporate Governance Code which is 
issued by the Financial Reporting Council 
and which is available at www.frc.org.uk. 
The code sets out guidance in the form 
of principles and provisions on how 
companies should be directed and 
controlled to follow good governance 
practice. Companies listed in the UK 
are required to disclose how they have 
applied the main principles and whether 
they have complied with its provisions 
throughout the financial year. Where the 
provisions have not been complied with 
companies must provide an explanation. 

The board considers that the company 
has complied with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code dated June 2010 
throughout the year, except in the 
following area.
B.7.1
B.7.1 requires that all directors of 
FTSE 350 companies should be subject 
to annual election by shareholders. 
At the last AGM three directors submitted 
themselves for re‑election as the other 
directors had submitted themselves 
for re‑election the previous year. 
This year the company will ask all 
of its directors to submit themselves 
for re‑election. 

CHAIRMAN’S INTRODUCTION
“ As chairman, with responsibility for ensuring that high standards 
of corporate governance are maintained, I am pleased to introduce 
the corporate governance report for 2012/13.

  We recognise that good governance is important in helping the business to 
deliver its strategy, generate shareholder value and safeguard our shareholders’ 
long‑term interests. We also note the emphasis within the UK Corporate 
Governance Code (the code) on well balanced, effective boards, strong 
oversight of risk management, alignment of remuneration policies with 
shareholder interests and sound shareholder relations.

  This year’s corporate governance report, and the sections therein from each 
of the board committees, describes the operation of the board and explains 
how we applied the principles of good governance set out in the code during 
the year. This was a year when we saw the retirement of Norman Murray as 
senior independent director and chairman of the remuneration committee. 
Ian Durant, who has been on the board since 2007, has taken over as senior 
independent director, whilst Lynne Weedall was appointed to the board 
in October 2012 and took over as chairman of the remuneration 
committee at the beginning of this calendar year.

  The directors’ remuneration report sets out details of the 
remuneration review we have been conducting during 
the course of the last year, which incorporates a number 
of additional disclosures consistent with the government’s 
proposed new regulations on remuneration reporting 
which will apply to the company next year.” 

Tim Bridge
Chairman

The board
Board composition
As at the year end the board comprised the 
chairman, two executive directors and four 
non‑executive directors. The non‑executive 
chairman is Tim Bridge, the chief executive 
Rooney Anand, and the senior independent 
director Ian Durant.

The directors’ biographies are on page 38. 
The board believes that the structure and 
size of the board is appropriate and that no 
single individual or group dominates the 
decision making process. 
Independence of 
non‑executive directors
In compliance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code, more than half of the board, 
excluding the chairman, are non‑executive 
directors and the board is satisfied that all 
of these were independent throughout the 
year, in that they satisfied the independence 
criteria of the code on their appointment 
and continue to satisfy those criteria. 

Tim Bridge, the chairman, was not independent 
on appointment, having previously served 

as chief executive. However, the board is 
satisfied that he shows independent judgment, 
that his performance as chairman is effective 
and that he demonstrates continued 
commitment to the role. 

Prior to his retirement at the end of 
December 2012 Norman Murray was the 
senior independent non‑executive director 
and thereafter Ian Durant took over that role. 
Ian Durant has never been employed by the 
company and has diverse business interests. 
The board considers that he remained 
independent in both character and judgment, 
that his performance has been effective and 
that he has demonstrated commitment to 
the role. The same was also applicable to 
Norman Murray whilst he was the senior 
independent director. As well as supporting 
the chairman, a key responsibility for the 
senior independent director is to be available 
for direct contact from shareholders should 
they require. 
Diversity
The board approves of the principle of 
trying to recruit more women into senior 
management and director roles. When making 

new appointments, the policy of the company 
is to recruit on merit for each role on offer, 
whether executive or non‑executive. We set 
out a job specification and a profile of the likely 
characteristics, qualifications, experience 
and merits required before starting a search, 
and aim to find the individual who is best 
suited to the role, without prejudice between 
male and female candidates. 

During the year Lynne Weedall was appointed 
to the board as a new non‑executive director 
and became chairman of the remuneration 
committee at the beginning of January 2013. 
We thus currently have one female director 
on the board. Notwithstanding Lord Davies’ 
desire for targets to be set, and looking 
forward to where we may be by 2015, we do 
not think a percentage target is the right 
way to address the issue of female directors 
for a board of seven people, where the key 
will be to ensure a suitable range of skills, 
experience and knowledge across the board 
members and where the issue of gender and 
diversity will be just one consideration taken 
into account when filling board vacancies. 

40

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Leadership
Role of the board
The board is collectively responsible for 
the long‑term success of the company. The 
chairman is responsible for the leadership 
and effectiveness of the board and for ensuring 
that each non‑executive director is able to 
make an effective contribution to the board 
through debate and discussion with the 
executive directors. He is also responsible for 
setting the style and tone of board discussions.

The chief executive’s role is to develop the 
company’s strategic direction and to lead 
senior management in executing the 
company’s strategy and dealing with the 
operational requirements of the business. 

The non‑executive directors have a particular 
responsibility to ensure that the strategies 
proposed by the executive directors are 
carefully examined and fully discussed, that 
the performance of the company is monitored 
and challenged and that the financial 
information provided is comprehensive 
and accurate. They are also responsible for 
ensuring, through the relevant committees, 
that appropriate remuneration arrangements 
are in place for the executive directors.

The offices of chairman and chief executive 
are separate and distinct. The division of 
responsibilities between them has been 
clearly established, set out in writing and 
agreed by the board. The job descriptions 
are available on request.

Operation of the board
The board has a formal schedule of matters 
which is reserved for its decision, including 
approval of the long‑term objectives and 
strategy, approval of budgets and financial 
statements including the report and accounts, 
acquisitions and disposals, changes to the 
structure of the group and overall corporate 
governance issues. It reviews trading 
performance and considers major capital 
expenditure and acquisition opportunities. 

The board has delegated certain 
responsibilities to standing committees, details 
of which are set out below. By delegating key 
responsibilities to these committees, the 
board is able to ensure that adequate time is 
devoted by board members to the oversight 
of key areas within their responsibility.

Day‑to‑day management and control of the 
business is delegated to the executive directors 
and the business unit managing directors, 
who meet formally on a monthly basis together 
with other senior managers as appropriate. 

Board meetings are scheduled to be held eight 
times a year, with main meetings linked to key 
events in the company’s financial calendar, 
with the annual results and dividend being 
approved in June or July and the interim 
results and dividend in November or December. 
Regular agenda items include an overview 
of the market and current trading as well as 
a detailed review of financial performance 
against agreed targets. 

There is a two‑day off‑site meeting for the 
board in February each year focusing on 
strategy, with the business unit managing 
directors attending for part thereof. The 
strategy sessions include an in‑depth review 
of relevant economic factors, management’s 
projections for the medium term and provide 
the board with an opportunity to agree the 
strategic plans for the short and medium 
term. Following approval of the company’s 
strategy, budgets are prepared for the next 
financial year to be approved by the board 
in April. The board reviews each business 
unit and main functional area (including 
property and commercial) in detail at least 
once each year, with particular focus on the 
achievement of strategic objectives, with the 
relevant managing director and functional 
head attending to present and answer questions.

Between meetings, as required, the board 
can be in frequent contact to progress the 
company’s business and if necessary, board 
meetings can be held at short notice. Where 
possible, however, ad hoc committees of the 
board are appointed to deal with matters 
which it is known will need to be dealt with 
between scheduled board meetings. It is 
expected that all directors attend board and 
relevant committee meetings, unless they are 
prevented from doing so by prior commitments. 
If directors are unable to attend meetings in 
person or by telephone they are given the 
opportunity to be consulted and comment 
in advance of the meeting. 

m

Greene King board

The board is ultimately responsible 
for the long‑term success of the 
company. Its principal responsibilities 
are to:

 • approve the group’s long‑term objectives, commercial strategy and the overall 

funding strategy;

 • approve the budgets and financial statements, including the report and accounts;
 • approve acquisitions and disposals; and
 • oversee the group’s operations and review performance in the light of the group’s 

strategy, objectives, business plans and budgets.

e
e
t
t
i

m
m
o
C

s
r
e
b
m
e
M

Nomination
Reviews structure, size 
and composition of the board; 
makes recommendations 
for appointments; 
succession planning.

Remuneration
Sets remuneration policy; sets 
executive director remuneration 
and incentives; approves annual 
performance objectives; approves 
granting of long‑term incentives.

Audit
Reviews and monitors full year and 
interim results; monitors internal 
financial controls; oversees 
external audit relationship; 
oversees risk management.

Tim Bridge (Chairman), 
John Brady, Mike Coupe, 
Ian Durant, Lynne Weedall

Lynne Weedall (Chairman), 
John Brady, Ian Durant

Ian Durant (Chairman), 
John Brady, Mike Coupe

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

41

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Corporate governance statement continued

Leadership continued
Operation of the board continued
Attendance at scheduled meetings held during the year is set out below:

Executive directors
Rooney Anand
Matthew Fearn

Non-executive directors
Tim Bridge
John Brady
Ian Durant
Norman Murray*
Mike Coupe
Lynne Weedall**

Board

Audit
committee

Remuneration
committee

Nomination
committee***

8/8
8/8

8/8
8/8
8/8
5/5
7/8
5/5

—
—

—
3/3
3/3
—
3/3
—

—
—

—
4/4
4/4
2/2
—
3/3

—
—

2/2
2/2
1/1
1/1
1/1
1/1

*   Norman Murray retired from the board on 31 December 2012.
**  Lynne Weedall was appointed to the board on 11 October 2012.
***  Membership of the nomination committee was extended to all non‑executive directors with effect from 1 January 2013.

Board papers are circulated seven days prior 
to each board or committee meeting to ensure 
that directors have sufficient time to review 
them before the meeting. Documentation 
includes detailed management accounts, 
reports on current trading, reports from 
each business unit and main functional area 
and full papers on matters where the board 
is required to give its approval. 

The chairman holds regular, informal 
meetings with the non‑executive directors 
without the executive directors being present 
and the non‑executives also meet with the 
chairman and the chief executive on an 
informal basis twice each year.

Board effectiveness
Board performance and evaluation
There is an on‑going dialogue within the 
board to ensure that it operates effectively. 
As a result of points raised during the year 
an additional session on strategy planning 
was held prior to the two‑day off‑site strategy 
meeting. Non‑executive directors also 
requested and have been given more access 
to senior management other than the business 
unit managing directors.

Given that an external evaluation exercise 
was undertaken during the 2011/12 financial 
year, it was agreed that the evaluation this 
year would be undertaken internally. It took 
the form of a detailed questionnaire that all 
directors were asked to complete and return 
to the chairman. The questionnaires covered 
a range of areas including questions on board 
structure and composition, strategy and 
financials, board processes, risks, the board’s 
committees and on corporate governance 
generally. The responses by the directors 

were discussed at the nomination committee 
and the board.

An externally facilitated evaluation will 
need to be performed again in two years’ 
time, in accordance with the requirements 
of the code.

An appraisal of the chairman’s performance 
was initiated prior to the year end and 
completed recently. The performance of the 
executive directors is reviewed annually by 
the remuneration committee in conjunction 
with their annual pay review and the payment 
of bonuses. 
Training and support
Each director is responsible for ensuring that 
they remain up to date in their skills and 
knowledge of the company and the training 
needs of the board and its committees are 
regularly reviewed. Particular emphasis is 
placed on ensuring that directors are aware 
of proposed legislative changes in areas 
such as remuneration, corporate governance 
and financial reporting and sector specific 
issues. All directors are also encouraged to 
visit the company’s pubs and restaurants 
and do so throughout the year. 

Newly‑appointed directors receive a tailored 
induction on joining the board to acquaint 
them with the company. This generally 
takes the form of meetings with other board 
members and senior management and the 
provision of an induction pack containing 
general information on the company, its 
policies and procedures, financial and 
operational information and a briefing on 
directors’ responsibilities. Lynne Weedall 
was provided with specific training on the 
obligations of directors of listed companies 

shortly after her appointment and also 
met with remuneration advisers prior 
to taking over as chairman of the 
remuneration committee.

There is an agreed procedure, set out in writing, 
for directors, in furtherance of their duties, 
to take independent professional advice 
at the company’s expense. Directors also 
have access to the services of the company 
secretary. The company has in place directors’ 
and officers’ liability insurance.
Conflicts of interest
The board has the right, under the articles of 
association, to approve potential situational 
conflicts of interest. A small number of such 
potential conflicts has been approved by the 
board following disclosure by certain directors, 
in each case with the relevant director not 
taking part in any decision relating to their 
own position. Directors are also aware that the 
disclosure and authorisation of any potential 
conflict situation does not detract from their 
requirement to notify the board separately 
of an actual or potential conflict in relation 
to a proposed transaction by the company. 

Communication with shareholders 
The board is keen to ensure that our 
shareholders have a good understanding 
of the business and its performance, and 
that the directors are aware of any issues 
or concerns which shareholders may have. 
Communication with shareholders takes 
a variety of forms.
Institutional shareholders and analysts
There is a regular dialogue with institutional 
shareholders, including meetings after the 
announcement of the year‑end and interim 
results. Analysts are also invited to 

42

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Communication with shareholders 
continued
Institutional shareholders and analysts 
continued
presentations at those times and separately 
to analyst trips to visit our premises and 
hear presentations on specific divisions of 
the business. The board receives regular 
reports from the chief executive on the 
meetings he and the finance director have 
with principal shareholders, and copies 
of analyst’s reports on the company. 

Recently a consultation exercise has been 
held with a number of the company’s major 
shareholders in relation to the company’s 
executive remuneration and the proposed 
introduction of a new LTIP. The senior 
independent non‑executive director, 
Ian Durant, is available to shareholders if 
they have concerns about governance issues 
which the normal channels of contact fail 
to resolve. 
Annual general meeting
The AGM is fully utilised as a means of 
communicating directly with private 
shareholders, who receive a brief presentation 
on the business before the substantive part 
of the meeting begins. They also have the 
full opportunity to ask questions during the 
meeting and to meet directors and senior 
management informally after the meeting. 
The board aims to ensure that all members 
of the board, including in particular the 
chairmen of the board committees, are 
available to answer questions at the AGM. 

All substantive items of business at 
shareholders’ meetings are dealt with under 
separate resolutions, including a resolution 
to adopt the report and accounts. The chairman 
announces the results of the proxy voting 
on each resolution after it has been dealt 
with on a show of hands. 
Website
The company maintains a website  
(www.greeneking.co.uk) to provide up‑to‑date, 
detailed information on the company’s 
operations and brands, which includes 
a dedicated investor relations section. 
All company announcements are available 
on this site, as are copies of slides used for 
presentations to investment analysts. We 
are happy to answer questions by telephone 
or email (investorrelations@greeneking.co.uk 
or companysecretary@greeneking.co.uk).

Board committees
The board has established a nomination 
committee, a remuneration committee 
and an audit committee, each of which has 
formal terms of reference governing its method 

of operation. Each of the terms of reference, 
which have been approved by the board, are 
available on request or to download from 
the company’s website and will be available 
for inspection at the AGM.

Set out below are reports from each of the 
nomination committee, remuneration 
committee and audit committee.

Nomination committee report
During the year the nomination committee 
was chaired by Tim Bridge. The other members 
of the committee were Norman Murray 
and John Brady until 31 December 2012. 
With effect from 1 January 2013 and after 
discussion with the non‑executive directors, 
it was determined that all the non‑executive 
directors should be appointed as members 
of the committee. Apart from the chairman, 
all members were considered by the board 
to be independent.

The role of the 
nomination committee
The role of the nomination committee 
is to identify, evaluate and nominate 
candidates for appointment to the board, 
to review regularly the structure, size 
and composition (including skills, 
knowledge and experience) of the 
board and make recommendations to 
the board with regard to any adjustments 
that are deemed necessary. 

The committee is also responsible for 
considering the company’s succession 
plans for board members and senior 
management, taking into account the 
challenges and opportunities facing the 
company, and what skills and expertise 
are therefore needed on the board in 
the future, and for reviewing membership 
of the board’s committees to ensure 
that undue reliance is not placed upon 
any individuals.

The committee met twice during the year. 
Attendance at these meetings by the 
committee members is shown in the table 
on page 42.

Matters considered by the committee during 
the year included the proposed appointment 
of Lynne Weedall, board succession planning, 
committee composition, the board evaluation 
exercise and the re‑election of directors. 

With regard to the appointment of Lynne 
Weedall, the focus was on finding someone 
who could take over the role of chairman 
of the remuneration committee. The Zygos 
Partnership, which provides no other services 

to the group, was appointed to assist and was 
asked to produce a short list of about six 
candidates, which included both men and 
women. At the end of the process Lynne 
Weedall was selected as the best candidate. 
Arrangements were made for her to meet 
all of the other non‑executive directors 
prior to her appointment being 
recommended to the board.

That appointment was also part of the 
succession planning activities of the 
committee. It was made in a timely manner 
prior to Norman Murray’s retirement, to 
enable a few months’ smooth handover 
between them. Succession planning will 
continue to be a focus for the committee’s 
activities during next year.

Having considered what has now become 
standard market practice in this area, and 
on the recommendation of the nomination 
committee, the board has decided this year 
to ask all directors to stand for re‑election 
at the forthcoming AGM. 

Remuneration committee report
The remuneration committee was chaired 
during the year by Norman Murray until his 
retirement from the board on 31 December 2012. 
Lynne Weedall joined the committee on her 
appointment to the board in October 2012, and 
then took over as chairman from 1 January 2013. 
The other members of the committee were 
Ian Durant and John Brady. All the members 
are considered by the board to be independent. 

The role of the 
remuneration committee
The role of the committee includes 
determining the remuneration policy for 
the executive directors, the chairman 
and those members of senior management 
whose details appear on page 38 and 39. 
It agrees the total individual remuneration 
package of each of the executive directors 
and those senior managers, considers the 
granting of awards under the long‑term 
incentive plan and determines bonuses 
payable to the executive directors and 
senior managers.

The remuneration committee held four 
scheduled meetings during the year. 
The chairman and the chief executive, 
at the request of the committee, attend its 
meetings. The chairman does not participate 
in any discussions relating to his own 
remuneration. The chief executive is 
consulted by the committee on its proposals, 
but does not participate in any discussions 
relating to his own remuneration. 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

43

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Corporate governance statement continued

Remuneration committee report 
continued
The committee’s external adviser, 
NewBridgeStreet Consultants, attended 
three of the meetings in connection with 
the review of the company’s remuneration 
structure.

Details of the company’s policies on 
remuneration, service contracts and 
compensation payments are set out in 
the remuneration report on pages 46 to 50.

Audit committee report
The audit committee was chaired during 
the year by Ian Durant. The other members 
of the committee were John Brady and 
Mike Coupe. All members are considered by 
the board to be independent. The board is 
satisfied that Ian Durant has recent and 
relevant financial experience, as the former 
finance director of Liberty International plc, 
since renamed as Intu Properties PLC. 

The role of the audit committee
The role of the audit committee is to 
review the financial reporting process, and 
the related external audit conclusions, 
of the full year and interim results, in 
each case prior to their submission to 
the board. It is also responsible for 
reviewing the company’s internal 
financial control systems, advising the 
board on the appointment of the external 
auditor, overseeing the relationship 
with the external auditor, reviewing the 
company’s whistle blowing procedures 
and considering the need for a full 
internal audit function. It also reviews 
the group’s risk management policies 
and procedures prior to submission to 
the board and receives detailed reports 
on the risk management processes within 
the business units. Regular updates are 
provided to the committee on regulatory, 
accounting and reporting developments 
under relevant financial standards 
and codes.

There is a planned programme of meetings 
during the year to deal with all matters within 
the committee’s sphere of responsibility. 
The committee had three meetings and on 
each occasion the finance director and senior 
members of the finance function attended. 
The external auditor attended all of the 
meetings. There is an opportunity at each 
meeting for the committee to discuss 
matters privately with the auditor without 
management present. In addition, the 
chairman of the committee is in regular 
contact with the external audit partner to 
discuss matters relevant to the company.

Financial statements and audit
Before the start of the audit cycle, the 
committee reviewed the audit plan presented 
by the auditor and agreed the scope of the 
audit work. The committee then discussed 
a range of issues arising from the audit and 
reviewed the consistency of accounting 
policies on a year to year basis and across 
the group, and the methods used to account 
for significant or unusual transactions, 
including in particular the assessment of 
impairment losses and tax. During the year 
particular attention was paid to the accounting 
changes necessitated by the closure of the 
group’s final salary pension schemes to future 
accrual. The committee reviewed management’s 
attestation paper setting out the information 
that had been provided to the auditor to enable 
them to form their opinion on the group’s 
financial statements and demonstrating that 
it was appropriate for the directors to make 
the representations set out in the letter of 
representation. The financial statements 
and interim results themselves were also 
reviewed in detail prior to their submission 
to the board. 

After the audit was completed a review 
of the effectiveness of the auditor and of 
the audit service was undertaken by means 
of a questionnaire completed by the audit 
committee chairman, the group finance 
director, and a number of key members of 
the finance team involved in the preparation 
of the statutory accounts. The review covered 
the overall quality of the service, the audit 
partner and the audit team, and considered 
matters such as the management of the 
audit team, the quality of their insight and 
communications and the cost‑effectiveness 
of the audit. The committee reviewed the 
feedback provided and satisfied itself as to 
the quality of the audit service. The feedback 
was also provided to Ernst & Young.
External auditor
Ernst & Young have been the company’s 
auditor since 1997. They are required to 
rotate the audit partner responsible for the 
group and subsidiary audits every five years 
and the current audit partner was appointed 
in the autumn of 2011. The board is aware of 
the new requirements of the UK Corporate 
Governance Code with regard to audit 
tendering and is currently proposing to put 
the audit of the group and subsidiary accounts 
out to tender no later than 2016, with a view 
to any change, if agreed, taking effect for 
the 2016/17 statutory accounts, at the end of 
the current audit partner’s term. In addition 
to the assessment of the effectiveness of the 
audit outlined above, the committee also 
assessed and found itself satisfied with the 
objectivity and independence of Ernst & Young, 
on the basis set out below, and, accordingly, 
agreed to recommend Ernst & Young’s 
re‑appointment as auditor to the board. 

This resolution will be put to shareholders 
at the AGM.

The audit committee has established a policy 
in relation to the use of Ernst & Young LLP 
for non‑audit work. The company will award 
non‑audit work to the firm which provides 
the best commercial solution for the work in 
question, taking into account the skills and 
experience of the firm, the nature of the 
services involved, the level of fees relative to 
the audit fee and whether there are safeguards 
in place to mitigate to an acceptable level 
any threat to objectivity and independence 
in the conduct of the audit resulting from 
such services. 

Work estimated to cost in excess of £25,000 
is put out to tender unless agreed otherwise 
by the chairman of the audit committee. 
The finance director may approve specific 
engagements up to £50,000 (in aggregate up 
to £100,000 pa), and the chairman of the audit 
committee may approve engagements up to 
£100,000 (in aggregate up to £200,000 pa), 
with fees in excess of those limits being subject 
to approval of the full committee. During 
the year the company made limited use of 
specialist teams within Ernst & Young LLP 
for non‑audit work such as taxation advice, 
primarily in relation to certain tax matters 
on which Ernst & Young LLP specialists 
had originally advised. The committee was 
satisfied that the use of separate teams, and 
in particular the use of a separate team to 
audit the tax disclosures in the report and 
accounts, ensured that auditor independence 
and objectivity was safeguarded. The total 
fees paid to Ernst & Young LLP amounted 
to £382,000, of which £56,000 related to 
non‑audit work.

The committee also reviewed and debated a 
report from Ernst & Young LLP in which it 
confirmed compliance with its own policies, 
procedures and ethical standards, including 
those of the Auditing Practices Board, in 
relation to auditor objectivity and independence, 
and, after due consideration, satisfied itself 
that the safeguards put in place to protect 
the independence and objectivity of the 
service provided by the external auditor 
were appropriate. 

The committee also approved a policy 
in relation to the appointment of former 
employees of the auditor by the group. The 
policy provides that audit partners will not 
be offered employment by Greene King or 
any of its subsidiary undertakings within 
two years of undertaking any role on the 
audit. Other key team members will not be 
offered employment by Greene King within 
six months of undertaking any role on the 
audit. Other audit team members who accept 
employment by Greene King must cease 
activity on the audit immediately when they 
tender their resignation to the audit firm.

44

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Audit committee report continued
Internal audit
The committee reviewed the company’s 
internal audit function, which currently 
focuses primarily on the group’s Retail 
division, although its remit is being expanded. 
Elsewhere within the group a combination 
of the external audit procedures and the 
types of financial risks involved are felt to 
be such that a wider internal audit function 
is not required. This will be reviewed on an 
annual basis.
Other matters
The committee reviewed, as it does on an 
annual basis, the group’s whistle blowing 
policy and its application across the business. 

A review of the group’s tax risk policy was 
undertaken during the year to ensure that 
clear guidance was available to management 
in relation to future tax arrangements.

The terms of reference of the committee 
were also reviewed and updated during the 
year and an exercise was undertaken to assess 
the effectiveness of the audit committee itself. 
Internal control and risk management
The board has overall responsibility for the 
group’s risk management framework and 
systems of internal control and for reviewing 
their effectiveness, whilst the audit committee 
monitors and reviews those internal controls 
and risks on a regular basis, and reports to 
the board on its findings. During the course 
of the year the committee reviewed in detail 
reports from each business unit and functional 
area on their respective risk management 
processes and key risks, so that each area was 
reviewed at least once. Representatives of 
the relevant business unit or functional area 
attended those meetings to present the reports 
and answer questions from the committee. 

A summary of the risk management 
framework is set out on page 28. The risk 
management framework and internal control 
systems are designed to manage, and not 
to eliminate, the risk of failure to achieve 
business objectives. They can provide 
reasonable, but not absolute, assurance that 
the group’s assets are safeguarded and that 
the financial information used within the 
business and for external reporting is reliable. 

The company has in place procedures to assess 
the key risks to which it is exposed and has 
formalised the control environment needed 
to address these and other issues. There are 
processes in place which accord with the 
guidance of the Turnbull Committee on 
internal control, and these remained in place 
up to the date of this report. The board 
is satisfied that there are no significant 
weaknesses in these systems.

The key elements of the internal 
control framework are:
 • the schedule of matters reserved 

for the board;

 • the group’s defined management 
structure with suitable authority 
limits and responsibilities, staffed 
by appropriate personnel;

 • regular updates for the board 

on strategy;

 • a comprehensive planning and 

financial reporting procedure including 
annual budgets and a three‑year strategic 
plan, both of which are reviewed and 
approved by the board; 

 • on‑going monitoring by both the 
board and senior management of 
performance against budgets, 
through the periodic reporting of 
detailed management accounts and 
key performance indicators;

 • on‑going monitoring by the board of 
compliance with financial covenants;

 • a centralised financial reporting 

system and close process, with controls 
and reconciliation procedures designed 
to facilitate the production of the 
consolidated accounts; 

 • clearly defined evaluation and 

approval processes for acquisitions 
and disposals, capital expenditure 
and project control, with escalating 
levels of authority (including board 
approval for major acquisitions and 
disposals), detailed appraisal and 
review procedures and post‑
completion reviews;

 • review of retail operational 

compliance by the retail internal audit 
team responsible and other analytical 
and control procedures facilitated 
by the EPOS till system; and

 • documented policies to cover bribery 

and whistle blowing and regular 
updates on any incidents. 

DTR Disclosure
The information required by DTR 7.1 and 
DTR 7.2 is set out in this report, except for 
information required under DTR 7.2.6 
which is set out in the directors’ report.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

45

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Directors’ remuneration report

LETTER fROM THE CHAIRMAN 
Of THE COMMITTEE
“ As the new chairman of the committee, I am pleased to introduce our 
directors’ remuneration report for the 2012/13 financial year. I would like 
first to express my thanks to Norman Murray for his work as chairman 
in the first half of the year.”

Lynne Weedall
Chairman

As you may be aware, the government has 
reformed the way directors’ remuneration is 
reported and voted upon. The new legislation 
will apply for our next annual report but the 
committee has decided to adopt some of the 
changes early, including separate sections 
on our remuneration policy going forwards 
and on implementation of our policy during 
the last year.

During the past year we have made good 
progress on our strategic priorities, increasing 
the size of our retail estate and reducing that 
of our tenanted and leased estate. At the same 
time, profit before tax and exceptional items 
has increased by 6.6%, the dividend has 
increased by 7.3% and our share price by 39% 
year‑on‑year. Our strong performance has 
helped ensure that the awards made under 
the long‑term incentive plan (LTIP) three years 
ago will vest in full on the third anniversary 
of their grant. The bonus outturn this year 
is 83% of salary for the CEO and 72% of salary 
for the group FD, which is lower than last 
year’s, reflecting the very stretching targets 
set at the beginning of the year. We continue 
to exercise restraint in executive pay levels 
and salary increases for executives will be 
a maximum of 2% for the forthcoming year, 
which is lower than the average of the 
workforce generally.

The company’s LTIP is due for renewal this 
year and we have taken the opportunity to 
undertake a full review of the company’s 
incentive arrangements. Following this 
review, the committee has made some 
amendments to the remuneration policy to 
ensure it both supports and motivates our 
senior team whilst at the same time continues 
to align them to the company’s strategic 
objectives and to achieving long‑term growth 
for shareholders. We have consulted with a 
number of our major shareholders in relation 
to these proposals and have been pleased 
with the generally positive responses received.

The key changes are as follows:

 • it was determined that the balance between 
short term (annual bonus) and longer term 
(LTIP) should be re‑weighted in favour 
of long‑term performance and that the 
performance conditions in the annual 
bonus and new LTIP should have a 
slightly different emphasis;

 • the annual bonus potential for executive 
directors will be reduced from 150% of 
salary to 100% of salary through the removal 
of the deferred share bonus scheme;

 • the LTIP grant level will be increased 
from 133% to 200% of base salary; 

 • LTIP awards will be subject to stretching 
EPS and ROCE targets, measured over 
three financial years; and

 • executive share ownership guidelines and 
clawback provisions – applicable to both 
the annual bonus and LTIP – are being 
introduced, in line with best practice.

The committee is conscious of the current 
climate on executive pay and is comfortable 
that this modest increase in the executive 
directors’ incentive opportunity does not 
raise total remuneration above mid‑market 
levels, particularly given the longer‑term focus 
of the package and the challenging targets 
that will apply to the enhanced LTIP awards. 

For this year, shareholders will be asked to vote 
on this remuneration report, as an ordinary 
resolution, at the company’s AGM, where 
we hope once again to receive your support. 
In addition, the new LTIP will also be subject 
to the approval of shareholders at the AGM, 
in the form of an ordinary resolution, 
and we very much hope you will vote 
in favour thereof.

Lynne Weedall
Chairman of the remuneration committee
26 June 2013

46

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

strategy and shareholder interests. The 
committee concluded that the remuneration 
policy, which is designed to ensure that the 
group offers a competitive, and not excessive, 
remuneration package so that it can attract, 
motivate and retain high quality directors 
able to deliver continued growth of the 
business and achieve the group’s strategic 
aims, remains broadly appropriate. 
General considerations
In designing this policy the committee has 
considered whether there are any aspects 
thereof which could inadvertently encourage 
executives to take inappropriate risk and is 
satisfied that this is not the case. The committee 
has also ensured that the incentive structure 
for executive directors and senior management 
does not raise environmental, social or 
governance risks by inadvertently motivating 
irresponsible behaviour.

INTRODUCTION AND 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION 
POLICY – UNAUDITED 
INFORMATION
The remuneration committee
The remuneration committee is appointed by 
the board. During the year the members were 
Norman Murray (chairman of the committee 
until his retirement from the board on 
31 December 2012), John Brady, Ian Durant 
and Lynne Weedall (from October 2012, and 
chairman from 1 January 2013). All of the 
committee members were regarded by the 
board as independent non‑executive directors. 

The role of the committee, as set out in its 
terms of reference (which are available on 
the company’s website), includes determining 
the remuneration policy for the executive 
directors, the chairman and those members 
of senior management whose details appear 
on pages 38 and 39. It agrees total individual 
remuneration packages, considers the granting 
of awards under the long‑term incentive plan 
and determines bonuses payable to the 
executive directors and senior managers.

It approves the service contracts of the 
executive directors and those senior managers 
and any compensation arrangements arising 
from their termination. The committee is 
made aware of, and takes into account, the 
salary levels of the wider senior management 
team and of the incentive arrangements 
operating throughout the company.

During the year there were four scheduled 
meetings of the committee. A further 
telephone conference call was also held 
specifically to consider the results of the 
shareholder consultation. All members 
of the committee attended each meeting.
Advisers to the remuneration committee
The committee seeks advice on general 
remuneration matters and comparator 
information from New Bridge Street, a 
subsidiary of Aon plc. Aon plc provides 
insurance broking and consultancy services 
to the group. The committee is satisfied 
that the provision of these services does 

not in any way prejudice the position of 
New Bridge Street as independent advisers 
to the committee. 

The committee has also sought legal advice 
from Eversheds on the terms of the new 
long‑term incentive plan and related matters.

Rooney Anand, chief executive, attends 
meetings of the committee and provides 
advice to help the committee determine 
appropriate remuneration and incentive 
packages for the finance director and the 
other senior executives, but he leaves the 
meeting when his own remuneration 
is being discussed. 
Consultation
The company engages regularly with 
shareholders on matters relating to its 
strategy and business operations. Where 
necessary, we also engage with shareholders 
and their representative bodies on matters 
relating to executive remuneration. 

During the year we consulted with our 
major shareholders, the Association of 
British Insurers (ABI) and Institutional 
Shareholder Services (ISS), in relation to our 
proposals following our remuneration 
review. The committee received support 
from the majority of shareholders consulted 
and the full range of views were carefully 
considered before finalising the arrangements, 
with changes to the policy being made 
as a result thereof.

The committee does not consult with 
employees when deciding remuneration 
policy, although it does receive information 
on salary increases for and other benefits, 
including bonuses, available to employees 
across the group. These matters were taken 
into account when conducting the review 
of executive remuneration. 
Remuneration policy
Introduction 
As explained above, the committee conducted 
a review of the company’s policy and practices 
during the year to ensure that they continue 
to be appropriately aligned with company 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

47

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Directors’ remuneration report continued

INTRODUCTION AND DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION POLICY – UNAUDITED INFORMATION continued
Components of directors’ remuneration
The key elements of the remuneration package of each executive director during the 2013/14 financial year are as follows:

PURPOSE AND LINK 
TO STRATEGy

OPERATION

MAxIMUM 
OPPORTUNITy

PERfORMANCE 
METRICS

CHANGES 
fOR 2013/14

Base salary

To recruit, reward 
and retain high 
calibre executives.

Reviewed annually or when a 
change in responsibility occurs, 
to reflect the executive’s 
responsibilities, market value 
and sustained performance level. 

In setting pay levels, the 
committee considers current 
market practice and makes 
comparisons against a selection 
of other companies determined 
by reference to turnover, market 
capitalisation and operational 
details. Account is also taken of 
the level of pay awards across 
the rest of the business.

When reviewing base salaries, 
the committee is mindful of 
the gearing effect that increases 
in base salary will have on the 
potential total remuneration 
of the executive directors.

Annual performance bonus

To incentivise executive 
directors to deliver 
superior performance 
during the course of 
a year, and to promote 
retention and stability 
amongst the senior 
management team.

Bonuses are paid entirely in cash, 
subject to the achievement of 
stretching performance targets 
set at the beginning of each 
financial year.

Clawback may apply in 
circumstances of a material 
misstatement of the company’s 
accounts, gross misconduct, 
negligence, fraud or error.

Long-term incentive plan (LTIP)

Core and growth awards 
will be granted annually 
under the LTIP, in the form 
of nil‑cost options.

Awards vest on the third 
anniversary of grant, subject 
to performance, and will be 
exercisable until the tenth 
anniversary of grant.

Clawback may apply in 
circumstances of a material 
misstatement of the company’s 
accounts, gross misconduct, 
negligence, fraud or error.

To incentivise the 
executive directors to 
deliver superior levels of 
long‑term performance 
for the benefit of 
shareholders, thereby 
aligning their interests 
with those of our 
shareholders.

The EPS targets support 
the strategy to maintain a 
sustainable but stretching 
level of earnings growth 
whilst maintaining 
dividend growth and 
reducing net debt.

The ROCE targets 
focus on generating 
the necessary returns 
as capital needs to be 
re‑deployed in order 
to focus on Retail, 
growth of which forms 
a significant part of the 
company’s strategy. 

—

2012/13:  
CEO – £530,000 
Group FD – £335,000

2013/14: 
CEO – £540,600 
Group FD – £341,000

Increases of 2% and 1.8% 
for the CEO and group FD 
respectively. These increases 
compare with average pay rises 
across the group of 2.5%. 

A maximum of 100% of salary 
can be earned by the executive 
directors during the year.

Reduction in maximum 
opportunity from 150% to 100%. 
Use of free cash flow as a 
performance measure for 
2013/14. Introduction of 
clawback mechanism.

The CEO’s performance is 
measured against the following 
targets: PBTE (75%), free cash 
flow (15%) and personal 
targets (10%).

The Group FD’s performance 
is measured against the 
following targets: PBTE (52.5%), 
free cash flow (10%), ROI (10%) 
and personal targets (27.5%).

Increase of total long‑term 
incentive opportunity from 
133% to 200%. Introduction of 
two separate parts – core and 
growth awards. Use of ROCE 
as a performance measure 
for the growth award.

A maximum of 200% of salary 
can be awarded each year, 
100% as a core LTIP and 100% 
as a growth LTIP. Dividend 
equivalents will be paid on any 
shares that vest.

The core LTIP will be subject 
to suitably stretching EPS 
targets and the growth LTIP 
will be subject to ROCE 
targets, both measured over a 
period of three financial years. 

For 2013 awards:

There will be no vesting under 
the core LTIP for EPS growth 
of 12% or less, increasing on 
a straight‑line basis to fully 
vesting for growth of 24%. 

There will be no vesting 
for ROCE of 9.1% or less, 
increasing on a straight‑line 
basis to full vesting for 
ROCE of 9.8%. 

The committee retains the 
discretion to scale back the 
vesting levels of the growth 
awards in appropriate 
circumstances.

For future awards EPS and 
ROCE targets will be set which 
will be no less challenging 
in the circumstances.

48

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

PURPOSE AND LINK 
TO STRATEGy

OPERATION

MAxIMUM 
OPPORTUNITy

PERfORMANCE 
METRICS

CHANGES 
fOR 2013/14

Pension

To offer market 
competitive levels 
of benefit.

The company contributes to 
defined contribution pension 
arrangements for the executive 
directors or provides cash 
in lieu where appropriate.

Current contribution levels are 
25% of basic salary for the CEO 
and 20% for the group FD. 

—

Benefits

To help recruit and retain 
executives by being 
appropriately competitive 
with those offered at 
comparator companies.

Benefits principally include the 
provision of company cars (or cash 
allowances in lieu thereof ), fuel 
for company cars, life assurance 
and private medical insurance. 

All-employee share schemes

Benefits may vary by role 
and are reviewed periodically.

—

—

—

—

All employees, including 
executive directors, have 
the opportunity to build 
their shareholding in a 
tax‑efficient manner and 
further align their interests 
with those of shareholders.

Shareholding guidelines

To further align the 
interests of executive 
directors with those 
of shareholders.

Employees are invited to 
participate in the sharesave in 
January each year provided that 
they have the requisite service.

The maximum saving under 
the sharesave scheme is £3,000 
per annum, allowing employees 
to buy company shares at a 20% 
discount at the end of a three 
or five‑year savings period.

—

Executive directors are required 
to build and retain a shareholding 
of at least 100% of salary. 
To the extent the shareholding 
requirement has not been met, 
executives will be expected to 
retain at least 50% of the net 
exercised LTIP awards – 
applicable to any awards 
exercised after the 2013 AGM 
– until the requirement is met.

Non-executive directors’ fees

2013/14 fees: 
Chairman – £174,250 
NEDs – Basic fee – £44,100 
Additional fees for chairing 
the audit or remuneration 
committee – £7,150

The fees paid to the chairman 
and the other non‑executive 
directors are determined by 
the board. It is the board’s 
policy to take into account the 
median level of fees for similar 
positions in the market and the 
time commitment each 
non‑executive director makes 
to the group. The fees are 
agreed after taking external 
advice from New Bridge Street. 
The non‑executive directors 
do not have service agreements 
and cannot participate in the 
pension scheme, the bonus 
scheme or the share 
option schemes. 

—

—

—

Introduced in 2013.

—

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

49

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Directors’ remuneration report continued

INTRODUCTION AND 
DIRECTORS’ REMUNERATION 
POLICY – UNAUDITED 
INFORMATION continued
Indicative total remuneration levels
The graphs below provide scenarios for 
the potential future reward opportunity 
for each executive director, and the 
potential split between the different 
elements of remuneration, under three 
different performance scenarios – 
minimum, on‑target and maximum.

CHIEf ExECUTIVE OffICER

2,000,000

1,500,000

1,000,000

500,000

0

£2,325,141

47%

£1,649,391

33%

25%

43%

£703,341

100%

23%

30%

Minimum

On‑target

Maximum

GROUP fINANCE DIRECTOR

2,000,000

1,500,000

1,000,000

500,000

£428,400

£1,025,150
33%
25%

0

100%

42%

£1,451,400

47%

23%

30%

Minimum

On‑target

Maximum

Core and growth LTIP
Salary, pension and benefits

Annual bonus

Notes:

1.   Minimum relates to the value of the package 
assuming that salary, benefits and pension 
alone are paid. 

2.   The on‑target annual bonus opportunity, based 

on stretching performance targets, is 75% of salary 
for the chief executive and 75% for the group 
finance director.

3.   The on‑target vesting level under the core LTIP 
and the growth LTIP is assumed to be 50% 
and 50% respectively.

4.   The maximum scenario assumes full bonus payout 

and full vesting of LTIP awards. 

5.   No assumption as to share price growth is made 

in either the on‑target or the maximum scenarios.

Service agreements
Newly appointed executive directors are 
offered a service agreement with a notice 
period of one year. In the event of the 
employment of an executive director being 
terminated, the committee would pay due 
regard to best practice and take account of 
the individual’s duty to mitigate their loss.

The payment of any annual bonus in respect 
of the year of termination is subject to the 
discretion of the committee. The vesting of 
any LTIP awards will be governed by the rules 
of the LTIP. Awards will normally lapse unless 
the individual is considered a ‘good leaver’. 
An individual would generally be considered 
a ‘good leaver’ if they left the group’s 
employment by reason of injury, ill‑health, 
disability approved by the committee, 
redundancy or retirement, although the 
committee has the absolute discretion to 
treat any individual as a ‘good leaver’ for 
any other reason. In the case of a ‘good 
leaver’, payments would normally be scaled 
back to recognise the shorter period of 
service than the award was intended to 
cover and remain subject to outstanding 
performance conditions. 

Rooney Anand, whose employment with the 
company commenced on 6 August 2001, is 
subject to a one‑year notice period from the 
company. His contract does not contain any 
additional terms relating to compensation 
for termination of employment. The terms 
of his appointment as chief executive were 
agreed and set out in a letter dated 
24 December 2004.

Matthew Fearn’s contract may be terminated 
by the company on giving one year’s notice, 
without any additional terms relating to 
compensation for termination of employment.

Non‑executive directors are appointed 
pursuant to letters of appointment for 
three‑year periods. The table below sets 
out the start and expiry date of their 
respective appointments:

Director

Date of
appointment

Present
expiry date

Tim Bridge

2 May 05

1 May 14

John Brady
Mike Coupe
Ian Durant
Lynne Weedall

24 June 05
26 July 11
16 Mar 07
11 Oct 12

23 Jun 14
25 Jul 14
15 Mar 16
10 Oct 15

The appointments of all these non‑executive 
directors can be terminated by the company 
at any time on three months’ written notice, 
notwithstanding the present expiry 
dates above.

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION – AUDITED INFORMATION
Directors’ emoluments

Tim Bridge*
Rooney Anand
John Brady*
Mike Coupe*
Ian Durant*
Matthew Fearn
Norman Murray*1 
Lynne Weedall*2

Annual
pay
2013
£’000

Annual
fees
2013
£’000

Annual
bonus
2013
£’000

Non-cash
benefits 
2013
£’000

—
530
—
—
—
335
—
—

865

170
—
43
43
50
—
33
29

368

—
442
—
—
—
240
—
—

682

32
4
—
—
—
14
—
—

50

*  Non‑executive.
1   Norman Murray retired from the board on 31 December 2012.
2   Lynne Weedall was appointed to the board on 11 October 2012.

Other cash

Cash
in lieu of
pension
benefits  contribution
2013
£’000

2013
£’000

—
23
—
—
—
5
—
—

28

—
133
—
—
—
36
—
—

169

Total
2013
£’000

202
1,132
43
43
50
630
33
29

2,162

Total 
2012
£’000

196
1,121
43
33
49
424
49
—

1,915

50

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION – AUDITED INFORMATION continued
Annual bonus payment
The tables below outline the key annual financial and individual performance measures that applied to the main part of the 2012/13 
annual bonus payment, where directors were entitled to receive a bonus up to a maximum of 100% of salary: 

Below

Threshold

Target

Stretch

Chief executive – Rooney Anand
Corporate financial targets (90%)
PBTE
ROCE
In addition, a further 10% of salary was awarded for the achievement of two personal targets, at the discretion of the committee. 

*

Finance director – Matthew Fearn
Corporate financial targets (70%)
PBTE
ROCE
Personal targets (30%)

*

*

*

*

The resulting bonus payments were therefore £442k for Rooney Anand, equivalent to 83% of salary, and £240k for Matthew Fearn, 
equivalent to 72% of salary.
Deferred share bonus scheme
In addition to the annual bonus figures above, £130k (2012: £110k) of bonus will be payable to Rooney Anand and £82k (2012: £46k) to 
Matthew Fearn under the terms of the economic profit deferred share bonus scheme introduced in 2010. Additional economic profit of £3.7m 
in excess of the strategic plan was achieved against a maximum target of £7.5m. This resulted in a payout of 49% of the economic profit element 
of the bonus scheme, equating to 24.5% of each of Rooney Anand’s and Matthew Fearn’s salaries, compared with a maximum payout of 50% 
of salary. The bonus will be deferred in the form of restricted shares, which will be acquired shortly after the preliminary announcement 
of the results. They will be entitled to any dividends paid on those shares, which will be released to them if they remain in employment 
for a period of one year from the date that the shares are acquired.

The table below sets out the directors’ interests in the deferred share bonus scheme.

Rooney Anand
Matthew Fearn

Outstanding
as at 29 April
2012

Acquired
during the
period

Released
during the
period

Lapsed
during the
period

Outstanding
as at 28 April
2013

23,647
—

9,334
3,922

23,647
—

—
—

9,334
3,922

Release date

5 Jul 13
5 Jul 13

The deferred share bonus scheme will not be operated in future years, as explained in the chairman’s letter.
Directors’ pensions
Amounts paid or payable to the self‑invested personal pension schemes of the executive directors made by the company in respect of the period 
are shown in the table below: 

Rooney Anand
Matthew Fearn

2013
£’000

—
31

2012
£’000

20
33

During the course of 2012 Rooney Anand reached the lifetime allowance for contributions to his pension fund and accordingly no further 
contributions will be made to his pension. Contributions to Matthew Fearn’s pension are limited by the yearly allowance. Cash payments 
in lieu of pension contributions for both Rooney Anand and Matthew Fearn are set out in the emoluments table above.

Tim Bridge is a pensioner member of the group’s defined benefit scheme. His pension is equivalent to 1/45th of his final pensionable 
earnings for each year of service, with a pro rata payment for a part year, subject to HMRC limits. His final pensionable earnings were those 
received immediately prior to him ceasing to be chief executive.

During the year two former directors received additional pension income from the company. John Bridge, who retired as a director 
on 31 December 1989, received a pension of £35k pa in excess of his scheme entitlements and Bernard Tickner, who retired as a director 
on 27 August 1992, received a pension of £28k pa in excess of his scheme entitlements. As required by law, both of these figures are stated 
net of their company‑funded pension in payment at 31 March 1997.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

51

 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Directors’ remuneration report continued

ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION – AUDITED INFORMATION continued
Long‑term incentive plan
A summary of the directors’ interests under the long‑term incentive plan (LTIP) is shown below:

Rooney Anand

Date of
grant

9 Dec 09
12 Aug 10
4 Aug 11
6 Aug 12

Type
of award

restricted forfeitable shares
restricted forfeitable shares
restricted forfeitable shares
restricted forfeitable shares

Outstanding
as at
29 April
2012

153,000
160,000
147,000
—

Granted
during
the period

—
—
—
117,000

Vested
during the
period

153,000
—
—
—

Matthew Fearn

6 Aug 12

restricted forfeitable shares

—

74,000

—

Lapsed
during the
period

—
—
—
—

—

Outstanding
as at
28 April
2013

—
160,000
147,000
117,000

Performance period

May 09 – Apr 12
May 10 – Apr 13
May 11 – Apr 14
May 12 – Apr 15

74,000

May 12 – Apr 15

The market price of the shares on 6 August 2012, when the last awards were made, was 596.0p, although the number of shares comprising 
the award was determined by reference to the closing market price on 3 August 2012, namely 598.5p. 
Outstanding LTIP awards
The 2010 LTIP awards will vest at a rate of 100% on the third anniversary of their grant in August 2013 provided that the recipients remain 
employed by the group. The performance targets and vesting levels are set out below:

Vesting condition

EPS (represented 40% of the award)
Threshold vesting (0% vesting)
Target for 100% vesting
Figure achieved
Free cash flow (represented 60% of the award)
Threshold vesting (0% vesting)
Target for 100% vesting
Figure achieved

47.0p
51.0p
57.0p

£230.4m
£270.4m
£305.0m

The 2011 and the 2012 LTIP awards will only vest to the extent that the relevant performance targets are met over the three financial years 
ending in April 2014 and April 2015 respectively. In each case, a maximum of 60% of each award will vest if an adjusted free cash flow 
performance condition has been met and the remaining 40% of the award will vest if an earnings per share performance condition 
has been met. The target range for the aggregate adjusted free cash flow for the relevant three financial years, which is calculated 
on a straight‑line basis from 0% to 100%, is set out below:

Target level

Nil vesting
50% vesting
100% vesting

2011 award
3 years
to May 2014

2012 award
3 years
to May 2015

£250.0m £262.0m
£270.0m £282.0m
£290.0m £302.0m

The earnings per share performance conditions set a range for the EPS for the financial year ending in May 2014 (for the 2011 LTIP) or May 2015 
(for the 2012 LTIP) which the remuneration committee considered to be sufficiently challenging in the market conditions, but which is not 
disclosed due to its commercial sensitivity. 

The remuneration committee is advised on a regular basis as to how actual performance is tracking against the relevant targets. In relation to 
the 2011 and 2012 LTIP awards, based on the recent performance of the business and assuming that the business units continue to meet 
their stretching strategic plan targets, it is anticipated that the payout will reflect achievement of the maximum free cash flow and 
earnings per share targets. 

Details as to the extent to which the targets have actually been met and the awards have vested will be provided at the end of each three‑year 
performance period.

During the year the 2009 LTIP awards vested on the third anniversary of their grant as a result of the remuneration committee having 
determined that the performance conditions applicable to those awards had been met. Details of the awards that vested during the year, 
the notional gain before tax achieved by the directors and the number of shares retained on vesting, are set out below. Total gains made 
by directors under the LTIP in the period ended 28 April 2013 therefore amounted to £948,707 (2012: £nil). 

52

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

 
ANNUAL REPORT ON REMUNERATION – AUDITED INFORMATION continued
Long‑term incentive plan continued

Date of vesting

No. of
shares
which
vested

Market
value at
date of
vesting(p)

Award
price

Notional
gain before
tax (£)

No. of
shares
retained

Rooney Anand

9 Dec 12

153,000

nil

620.07

948,707

73,041

948,707

No changes were made during the year, or since the year end to the date of this report, to the terms and conditions of any awards then 
outstanding. Save as set out above, no awards vested or lapsed during the year. There have been no other changes to the date of this report. 
Executive share options
A summary of the directors’ interests in options granted under the company’s executive share option schemes is shown below: 

Tim Bridge

Rooney Anand

Date of
grant

1 Aug 03
6 Aug 04

6 Aug 04
4 Aug 05

Outstanding
as at
29 April
2012

112,127
99,669

54,817
74,751

Option
price

332p
408p

408p
528p

Granted
during the
period

Exercised
during the
period

Lapsed
during the
period

—
—

—
—

112,117
—

—
—

—
—

—
—

Outstanding
as at
28 April
2013

—
99,669

54,817
74,751

Exercise period

1 Aug 06 – 31 Jul 13
6 Aug 07 – 5 Aug 14

6 Aug 07 – 5 Aug 14
4 Aug 08 – 3 Aug 15

All relevant figures adjusted for 2‑for‑1 share split in September 2005 and the rights issue in May 2009.

Details of the options exercised during the year, the notional gain before tax achieved by the directors and the number of shares retained 
on exercise are set out below. Total gains made by directors under the executive share option scheme in the period ended 28 April 2013 
therefore amounted to £224,531 (2012: £nil). 

No. of
options
exercised

Option
exercise
price (p)

Market
value at
date of
exercise (p)

Notional
gain before
tax (£)

No. of
shares
retained

Date of exercise

Tim Bridge

28 Jun 12

112,127

332

532.25

224,531

21,769

224,531

No changes were made during the year to the terms and conditions of any options then outstanding (2012: no changes). There have been no 
options exercised and no other changes since the year end to the date of this report. 
Sharesave scheme
The company has operated a HMRC approved sharesave scheme for a number of years. Options are granted over the company’s ordinary 
shares at an option price which, at board discretion, is at a discount of up to 20% of the closing price at the time of granting. The company 
has historically granted all such options at a 20% discount. 

The interests of directors in options granted under the sharesave scheme were as follows:

Outstanding
as at
29 April
2012

Granted
during the
period

Exercised
during the
period

Lapsed
during the
period

Outstanding
as at
28 April
2013

Option
price (p)

Exercise period

Matthew Fearn

2,325 

—

—

—

2,325

387

1 Apr – 30 Sep 15

All options outstanding as at 28 April 2013 were granted at an option price below the year‑end closing price.
Remuneration from other company directorships
Until December 2012 Rooney Anand served as a non‑executive director of DriveAssist Holdings Limited, a company unconnected with the 
group. He received and retained for his personal benefit £23,000 from that company by way of director’s fees during the year. In July 2012 
he became non‑executive chairman of JB Drinks Holdings Limited, which is also unconnected with the group, and received and retained 
£22,500 from that company by way of fees. 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

53

 
 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Directors’ remuneration report continued

Other infOrmatiOn
Performance of Greene King 
A graph showing the total shareholder return of Greene King relative to the FTSE All-Share Index over the last five years is shown below. 
We have chosen this comparator group as it is the most appropriate market index of which the company is a member. 

250

200

150

100

50

)
0
0
1
o
t
d
e
s
a
b
e
r
(
R
S
T

0
May 08

Greene King
FTSE All-Share

May 09

April 10

April 11

April 12

April 13

Directors’ shareholdings

Director

Rooney Anand
Matthew Fearn
Tim Bridge
John Brady
Mike Coupe
Ian Durant
Lynne Weedall

 At 28 April 2013

At 29 April
2012
Legally
 owned 

199,753
6,162
1,340,991 
10,000
2,000
22,320
 — 

Legally
 owned 

272,794 
9,654
1,362,760 
10,000
2,000
22,320
2,000

Subject to
deferral
under the
deferred
share bonus
 scheme 

9,334
3,922
— 
— 
— 
— 
— 

Subject
to the
sharesave
 scheme 

Unexercised
share
 options 

— 
 2,325
— 
— 
— 
— 
— 

129,568 
— 
 99,669
— 
— 
— 
— 

Subject to
performance
under the
 LTIP 

424,000
74,000
— 
— 
— 
— 
— 

 Total 

835,696
89,901
1,462,429
10,000
2,000
22,320
2,000

Shareholding
as %
of salary
as at
28 April
2013

361%
20%
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

Share price during the period
The closing price of the company’s shares on 26 April 2013 (being the last business day before the financial period end) was 714.5p (2012: 512.5p). 
The closing price of the company’s shares during the period ranged between 474.3p and 723.5p. 

Approved by the board of directors on 26 June 2013.

Lynne Weedall
Chairman of the remuneration committee
26 June 2013

54

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

 
 
 
Directors’ report

The directors present their annual report 
together with the audited financial 
statements of the company and the group 
for the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013.

Profits and dividends
The group’s profit before taxation and 
exceptional items for the period amounted 
to £162.0m (2012: £152.0m). An interim 
dividend of 7.15p per share (2012: 6.7p) was 
paid on 25 January 2013. The directors 
recommend a final dividend of 19.45p per 
ordinary share (2012: 18.1p), making a total 
dividend for the year of 26.6p per share 
(2012: 24.8p). Subject to the approval of 
shareholders at the AGM, the final dividend 
will be paid on 9 September 2013 to 
shareholders on the register at the close 
of business on 9 August 2013.

Activities 
Greene King plc is the holding company 
for a group whose principal activities are 
operating managed, tenanted and leased 
public houses, brewing beer, and wholesaling 
beers, wines, spirits and soft drinks. 

Business review
Under the provisions of the Companies Act 
2006, the company is required to produce a 
business review containing a fair review of 
the business of the company and a description 
of the principal risks and uncertainties facing 
the company. Shareholders are referred to 
the chief executive’s review, the financial 
review, the KPIs, the risks and uncertainties 
section and the corporate social responsibility 
report for the required information. They 
are intended to provide a balanced and 
comprehensive analysis of the development 
and performance of the business of the 
group during the financial year and the 
position of the group at the end of the year.

Directors
Details of the current directors are given 
on page 38. All of the directors held office 
throughout the period apart from Lynne 
Weedall, who was appointed on 11 October 
2012, and Norman Murray, who held office 
until his retirement on 31 December 2012. 

In accordance with article 90 of the company’s 
articles of association, Lynne Weedall is 
offering herself for election at the forthcoming 
AGM. The board has recommended that all 
of the other directors offer themselves for 
re‑election at the forthcoming AGM. 

Details of the directors’ service agreements, 
remuneration, and interests in share options 
and awards are set out in the directors’ 
remuneration report. There have been 
no changes in their interests between 
28 April 2013 and the date of this report.

Directors’ interests in shares
The beneficial interests of each of the directors 
and their immediate families in the ordinary 

share capital of the company are shown below:

29 April
2012
 (or date of 
appointment
if later)

199,753
10,000
1,340,991
2,000
22,320
6,162
—

28 April
2013

272,794
10,000
1,362,760
2,000
22,320
9,654
2,000

Rooney Anand
John Brady
Tim Bridge
Mike Coupe
Ian Durant
Matthew Fearn
Lynne Weedall

At 28 April 2013, Tim Bridge had a 
non‑beneficial interest in 87,900 (2012: 88,700) 
shares, in addition to the holding shown above. 

There have been no changes in the interests 
of the directors between 28 April 2013 
and the date of this report.

Interests in contracts
No director had a material interest in any 
contract, other than an employment contract, 
that was significant in relation to the group’s 
business at any time during the period. 

Substantial shareholdings
The company has been notified of the 
following interests in 3% or more of the 
issued share capital of the company:

During March 2013, the employee benefit 
trust made ten market purchases of a total 
of 450,000 shares at a total price of £3,168,778. 
The share price was between 701.1p per share 
and 708.0p per share with an average price 
of 704.2p per share.

Voting rights
In a general meeting of the company, on a 
show of hands, every member who is present 
in person or by proxy and entitled to vote 
shall have one vote. On a poll every member 
who is present in person or by proxy shall 
have one vote for every share of which they 
are the holder. The AGM notice gives full 
details of deadlines for exercising voting 
rights in respect of resolutions to be 
considered at the meeting.

Under the Free4All Employee Profit Share 
Scheme, participants are the beneficial 
owners of the shares but not the registered 
owners. The registered owner is the trustee, 
Killik & Co Trustees Ltd. The trustee will 
invite participants to direct it on the exercise 
of any voting rights attaching to the shares 
held under the scheme by the trustee on the 
participants’ behalf. The trustee will only 
be entitled to vote on a show of hands if all 
directions received from participants are 
identical. The trustee is under no obligation 
to call for a poll. In the case of a poll, 
the trustee will follow the directions 
of the participants.

28 April
2013

25 June
2013

No voting rights will be exercised in respect 
of any own shares.

Standard Life 
Investments Ltd
Capital Research & 
Management Company
AXA S.A.

8.98%

8.98%

8.01%
4.99%

7.97%
4.99%

Share capital
Details of the authorised and issued share 
capital of the company, which comprises a 
single class of shares, ordinary shares of 12½p, 
are set out in note 26 to the accounts. The 
rights attaching to the shares are set out in 
the articles of association. There are no 
special control rights in relation to the 
company’s shares and the company is not 
aware of any agreements between holders 
of securities that may result in restrictions on 
the transfer of securities or on voting rights.

A total of 765k ordinary shares, with an 
aggregate nominal value of £96k, were allotted, 
for cash, during the period in connection 
with the company’s sharesave and executive 
option schemes. In addition a further 44k 
shares were acquired by the company to 
satisfy awards under the company’s deferred 
share option scheme.

The company makes regular use of the EBT 
to satisfy the exercise of share options and 
will make market purchases of the company’s 
shares from time to time to ensure that it 
has sufficient shares to enable it to do so. 

Transfer of shares
There are no restrictions on the transfer 
of shares in the company other than those 
which may from time to time be applicable 
under existing laws and regulations (for 
example under the Market Abuse Directive). 

In addition, pursuant to the Listing Rules of 
the Financial Services Authority, directors 
of the company and persons discharging 
managerial responsibility are required to 
obtain prior approval from the company to 
deal in the company’s securities, and are 
prohibited from dealing during closed periods.

Change of control
All of the company’s share incentive plans 
contain provisions relating to a change of 
control and full details of these plans are 
provided in the directors’ remuneration 
report. Outstanding options and awards 
would normally vest and become exercisable 
on a change of control, subject to the 
satisfaction of performance conditions, 
if applicable, at that time.

The group’s banking facility agreements 
contain provisions entitling the counterparties 
to exercise termination or other rights in 
the event of a change of control. Certain 
of the company’s trading contracts also 
contain similar provisions.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

55

 
CORPORATE GOVERNANCE
Directors’ report continued

Change of control continued
There are two employees who, on a change 
of control of the company resulting in the 
termination of their employment, would be 
entitled to compensation for loss of office. 
However, in the context of the company as 
a whole, these agreements are de minimis.

Articles of association
The company’s articles of association may 
only be amended by special resolution at 
general meetings of shareholders. 

Appointment and replacement 
of directors
The number of directors on the board shall 
be no less than five nor more than 12. 
Directors may be appointed by the company 
by ordinary resolution or by the board of 
directors. A director appointed by the board 
of directors holds office until the next 
following AGM, and is then eligible for 
election by the shareholders.

The articles provide that at each AGM all 
those directors who were elected, or last 
re‑elected, at the AGM held in the third 
calendar year before the current year shall 
retire from office and may stand for re‑election. 

The company may by ordinary resolution, 
of which special notice has been given, 
remove any director from office.

Any director automatically ceases to be 
a director if (i) they give the company a 
written notice of resignation, (ii) they give 
the company a written offer to resign and 
the directors decide to accept this offer, (iii) 
all of the other directors remove them from 
office by notice in writing served upon them, 
(iv) they are or have been suffering from 
mental ill health and have a court order 
for their detention or the appointment of 
a guardian made in respect of them, (v) a 
bankruptcy order is made against them or 
they make any arrangement or composition 
with their creditors generally, (vi) they are 
prohibited from being a director by law or 
(vii) they are absent from board meetings 
for six months without leave and the other 
directors resolve that their office should 
be vacated.

Powers of the directors
The business of the company is managed by 
the directors who may exercise all the powers 
of the company, subject to its articles of 
association, any relevant legislation and any 
directions given by the company by passing 
a special resolution at a general meeting. 
In particular, the directors may exercise all 
the powers of the company to borrow money, 
issue shares, appoint and remove directors 
and recommend and declare dividends.

Communications with shareholders
Shareholders who are interested in signing 
up to e‑communications should refer to 
the shareholders information page for 
further information on how to register 
via www.greeneking‑shares.com.

 • each director has taken all the steps a 
director might reasonably be expected 
to have taken to be aware of relevant 
audit information and to establish that 
the company’s auditor is aware of 
that information.

Charitable donations
Donations by the company for charitable 
purposes made during the period amounted 
to £17,305 (2012: £29,021). The group makes 
no political donations.

Payments to suppliers 
The group understands the benefits to be 
derived from maintaining good relationships 
with its suppliers and where possible enters 
into agreements over payment terms. Where 
such terms have not been agreed it is the group 
policy to settle invoices 60 days following 
the end of month of invoicing. This policy is 
dependent on suppliers providing accurate, 
timely and sufficiently detailed invoices. 
Payment in respect of 59 days’ average 
purchases from trade creditors of the group 
was outstanding at the end of the period 
(2012: 62 days).

Directors’ and officers’ 
indemnity insurance
The group has taken out insurance to 
indemnify, against third party proceedings, 
the directors of the company whilst serving 
on the board of the company and of any 
subsidiary. This cover indemnifies all 
employees of the group who serve on the 
boards of all subsidiaries. These indemnity 
policies subsisted throughout the year and 
remain in place at the date of this report.

Financial instruments
The group’s policy on the use of financial 
instruments is set out in note 24.

Post-balance sheet events
Details of events occurring after the year 
end are set out in note 32.

Directors’ statement as to 
disclosure of information 
to auditor
The directors who were members of the 
board at the time of approving the directors’ 
report are listed on page 38. Having made 
enquiries of fellow directors and of the 
company’s auditor, each of these directors 
confirms that:

 • to the best of each director’s knowledge 

and belief, there is no information relevant 
to the preparation of their report of which 
the company’s auditor is unaware; and

Going concern
The group’s business activities, together 
with the factors likely to affect its future 
development, performance and position, 
are set out in the chief executive’s review. 
The financial position of the group, its cash 
flows, liquidity position and borrowing 
facilities are described in the financial 
review. In addition, note 24 to the financial 
statements includes the group’s objectives, 
policies and processes for managing its capital; 
its financial risk management objectives; 
details of its financial instruments and 
hedging activities; and its exposure 
to credit and liquidity risk. 

The directors are of the opinion that the 
group’s forecast and projections, taking 
account of reasonably possible changes in 
trading performance, show that the group 
should be able to operate within its current 
borrowing facilities and comply with its 
financing covenants. 

After making enquiries, the directors have 
a reasonable expectation that the company 
and the group have adequate resources to 
continue in operational existence for the 
foreseeable future. Accordingly, they continue 
to adopt the going concern basis in preparing 
the annual report and financial statements.

Auditor
Ernst & Young LLP has expressed its 
willingness to continue in office and a 
resolution to re‑appoint the firm as the 
company’s auditor will be proposed 
at the AGM.

Annual general meeting 
The AGM will be held at 12 noon on 
Tuesday 3 September 2013 at the Millennium 
Grandstand, Rowley Mile Racecourse 
Conference Centre, Newmarket, Suffolk. 
The notice of the AGM is set out in the 
separate circular to shareholders. 

The directors consider that all of the 
resolutions set out in the notice of AGM are 
in the best interests of the company and its 
shareholders as a whole. The directors will 
be voting in favour of them and unanimously 
recommend that shareholders vote in favour 
of each of them.

By order of the board

Lindsay Keswick
Company secretary
26 June 2013

56

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Directors’ responsibility statement
The directors confirm, to the best 
of their knowledge:

 • that these financial statements prepared 
in accordance with IFRS, as adopted by 
the European Union, give a true and fair 
view of the assets, liabilities, financial 
position and profit of the company and 
undertakings included in the consolidation 
taken as a whole; and

 • that the directors’ report and the 

business review includes a fair review of 
the development and performance of the 
business and the position of the company 
and undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole, together 
with a description of the principal risks 
and uncertainties that they face.

The directors of Greene King pic are listed 
on page 38.

T J W Bridge 
Director   
26 June 2013

R Anand
Director

Directors’ responsibilities statements

Statement of directors’ 
responsibilities in respect of the 
group financial statements 
The directors are responsible for preparing 
the annual report and the group financial 
statements in accordance with applicable 
United Kingdom law and those International 
Financial Reporting Standards as adopted 
by the European Union.

Under company law the directors must not 
approve the group financial statements unless 
they are satisfied that they present fairly the 
financial position, financial performance 
and cash flows of the group for that period. 
In preparing those group financial statements 
the directors are required to:

 • select suitable accounting policies in 

accordance with IAS 8 Accounting Policies, 
Changes in Accounting Estimates and 
Errors and then apply them consistently;

 • present information, including accounting 

policies, in a manner that provides 
relevant, reliable, comparable and 
understandable information;

 • provide additional disclosures when 

compliance with the specific requirements 
in IFRSs is insufficient to enable users 
to understand the impact of particular 
transactions, other events and conditions 
on the group’s financial position and 
financial performance; 

 • state that the group has complied with 

IFRSs, subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the financial 
statements; and

 • make judgments and estimates that are 

reasonable and prudent.

The directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are 
sufficient to show and explain the group’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position 
of the group and enable them to ensure that 
the group financial statements comply with 
the Companies Act 2006 and Article 4 of the 
IAS Regulation. They are also responsible 
for safeguarding the assets of the group and 
hence for taking reasonable steps for the 
prevention and detection of fraud and 
other irregularities.

Statement of directors’ 
responsibilities in respect of the 
parent company financial statements
The directors are responsible for preparing 
the directors’ report and the financial 
statements in accordance with applicable 
law and regulations. Company law requires 
the directors to prepare financial statements 
for each financial year. Under that law the 
directors have elected to prepare the 
financial statements in accordance with 
United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom 
Accounting Standards and applicable law). 
Under company law the directors must not 
approve the financial statements unless they 
are satisfied that they give a true and fair 
view of the state of affairs of the company 
and of the profit or loss of the company for 
that period. In preparing those financial 
statements, the directors are required to:

 • select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;

 • make judgments and estimates 
that are reasonable and prudent;

 • state whether applicable UK Accounting 
Standards have been followed, subject to 
any material departures disclosed and 
explained in the financial statements; and

 • prepare the financial statements on the 

going concern basis unless it is appropriate 
to presume that the company will 
continue in business.

The directors are responsible for keeping 
adequate accounting records that are 
sufficient to show and explain the company’s 
transactions and disclose with reasonable 
accuracy at any time the financial position 
of the company and enable them to ensure 
that the company financial statements comply 
with the Companies Act 2006. They are also 
responsible for safeguarding the assets of the 
company and hence for taking reasonable 
steps for the prevention and detection 
of fraud and other irregularities.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

57

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

59   Independent auditor’s report (group)
60   Group income statement
61   Group statement of comprehensive income 
62   Group balance sheet
63   Group cash flow statement 
64   Group statement of changes in equity
65   Notes to the accounts 
96   Independent auditor’s report (company)
97   Company balance sheet 
98   Notes to the company accounts
102  Group financial record

Independent auditor’s report (group)
To the members of Greene King plc

We have audited the group financial statements of Greene King plc for the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013 which comprise the group income 
statement, group statement of comprehensive income, group balance sheet, group cash flow statement, group statement of changes in equity 
and the related notes 1 to 33. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation is applicable law and International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted by the European Union.

This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit 
work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s 
report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than 
the company and the company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditor
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out on page 57, the directors are responsible for the preparation of 
the group financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion 
on the group financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards 
require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance 
that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: 
whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the group’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately disclosed; 
the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the directors; and the overall presentation of the financial statements. In addition, 
we read all the financial and non-financial information in the annual report to identify material inconsistencies with the audited financial 
statements. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the implications for our report.

Opinion on financial statements
In our opinion the group financial statements:

 • give a true and fair view of the state of the group’s affairs as at 28 April 2013 and of its profit for the 52 weeks then ended;
 • have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the European Union; and 
 • have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion:

 • the information given in the directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent 

with the financial statements; and

 • the information given in the corporate governance statement set out on pages 40 to 45 with respect to internal control and risk management 

systems in relation to financial reporting processes and about share capital structures is consistent with the financial statements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception
We have nothing to report in respect of the following:

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

 • certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
 • we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
 • a corporate governance statement has not been prepared by the company.
Under the Listing Rules we are required to review:

 • the directors’ statement, set out on page 56, in relation to going concern; and
 • the part of the corporate governance statement relating to the company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the UK Corporate 

Governance Code specified for our review; and

 • certain elements of the report to shareholders by the board on directors’ remuneration.

Other matter
We have reported separately on the parent company financial statements of Greene King plc for the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013 
and on the information in the directors’ remuneration report that is described as having been audited.

Bob Forsyth (Senior statutory auditor)
for and on behalf of Ernst & Young LLP, Statutory Auditor
Cambridge 
26 June 2013

Notes:

1.   The maintenance and integrity of the Greene King plc website is the responsibility of the directors; the work carried out by the auditors does not involve consideration 
of these matters and, accordingly, the auditors accept no responsibility for any changes that may have occurred to the financial statements since they were initially 
presented on the website.

2.  Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

59

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Group income statement
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

Revenue

Operating costs

Operating profit 

Finance income

Finance costs

Other net finance income

Profit before tax

Tax

Note

2,3

4

2,4

7

7

7

10

Before
exceptional
items
£m

1,194.7 

(946.5)

0.4 

(87.2)

0.6 

162.0 

(38.9)

2013

Exceptional
items 
£m

2012

Before
exceptional
items
£m

Exceptional
items 
£m

Total
£m

Total
£m

— 

1,194.7 

(19.0)

(965.5)

1,140.4 

(904.2)

— 

1,140.4 

248.2 

(19.0)

229.2 

236.2 

— 

0.4 

(28.2)

(115.4)

— 

(47.2)

22.4 

0.6 

114.8 

(16.5)

98.3 

1.0 

(87.1)

1.9 

152.0 

(38.0)

114.0 

(24.9)

(24.9)

— 

(2.0)

— 

(26.9)

15.3 

(11.6)

(929.1)

211.3 

1.0 

(89.1)

1.9 

125.1 

(22.7)

102.4 

Total

47.6p

47.5p

Profit attributable to equity holders of parent

123.1 

(24.8)

Earnings per share

– basic

– adjusted basic

– diluted

– adjusted diluted

Dividends per share (paid and proposed in respect of the period)

2013

2012

Before
exceptional
items

12

12

12

12

11

57.0p

56.6p

26.6p

Total

45.5p

45.2p

Before
exceptional
items

53.0p

52.9p

24.8p

60

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

 
Group statement of comprehensive income
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

Profit for the period

Other comprehensive income

Cash flow hedges: 

– Losses taken to equity

– Ineffective portion transferred to income statement

Tax on cash flow hedges

Actuarial losses on defined benefit pension schemes

Tax on actuarial losses

Other comprehensive expense for the period, net of tax

Total comprehensive income for the period, net of tax

Note

2013
£m

2012
£m

 98.3 

 102.4 

24

24

10

9

10

 (38.4)

 (84.5)

28.2

 0.4 

 (9.8)

 (16.1)

 3.0 

 (13.1)

 (22.9)

 75.4 

—

 18.1 

 (66.4)

 (33.1)

 6.9 

 (26.2)

 (92.6)

 9.8 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

61

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Group balance sheet
As at 28 April 2013

Non-current assets

Property, plant and equipment

Goodwill

Financial assets

Deferred tax assets

Prepayments

Trade and other receivables

Current assets

Inventories

Financial assets

Trade and other receivables

Prepayments

Cash and cash equivalents

Property, plant and equipment held for sale

Current liabilities

Borrowings

Derivative financial instruments

Trade and other payables

Income tax payable

Provisions

Non-current liabilities

Borrowings

Derivative financial instruments

Deferred tax liabilities

Post-employment liabilities

Provisions

Total net assets

Issued capital and reserves

Share capital

Share premium

Capital redemption reserve

Hedging reserve

Own shares

Retained earnings

Total equity

Net debt

Signed on behalf of the board on 26 June 2013

T J W Bridge 
Director   

R Anand
Director

As at
28 April
2013
£m

As at
29 April
2012
£m

Note

14

13

15

10

19

18

15

19

20

21

23

24

22

25

23

24

10

9

25

26

2,211.1 

724.8 

2,191.3 

729.3 

26.0 

76.4 

0.9 

0.1 

32.8 

70.6 

7.3 

0.1 

3,039.3 

3,031.4 

27.0 

8.1 

73.9 

14.9 

31.0 

154.9 

8.4 

163.3 

29.4 

6.2 

68.6 

9.4 

36.8 

150.4 

6.2 

156.6 

(39.8)

(12.8)

(30.7)

(9.7)

(249.9)

(230.2)

(41.1)

(0.5)

(53.2)

(1.2)

(344.1)

(325.0)

(1,441.6)

(1,499.3)

(226.4)

(146.5)

(65.3)

(7.2)

(191.1)

(150.7)

(68.8)

(7.8)

(1,887.0)

(1,917.7)

971.5 

945.3 

27.3 

253.8 

3.3 

27.2 

251.3 

3.3 

(160.2)

(150.4)

(9.1)

856.4 

971.5 

(9.6)

823.5 

945.3 

29

1,450.4 

1,493.2 

62

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Group cash flow statement
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

Operating activities

Operating profit

Operating exceptional items

Depreciation

EBITDA*

Working capital and non-cash movements

Interest received

Interest paid

Tax paid

Net cash flow from operating activities

Investing activities

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Business combinations (net of cash acquired)

Advances of trade loans

Repayment of trade loans

Sales of property, plant and equipment

Net cash flow from investing activities

Financing activities

Equity dividends paid

Issue of shares

Purchase of own shares

Financing costs

Repayment of acquired debt

Repayment of borrowings

Advance of borrowings

Net cash flow from financing activities

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents

Opening cash and cash equivalents

Closing cash and cash equivalents

* EBITDA represents earnings before interest, tax, depreciation, and exceptional items.

Note

2013
£m

2012
£m

2

28

17

 229.2 

19.0 

58.3 

 306.5 

 6.0 

 0.4 

 (83.7)

 (32.9)

 196.3 

 (123.6)

 (0.9)

 (4.1)

 7.1 

 28.0 

 211.3 

24.9 

55.8 

 292.0 

 (10.0)

 1.0 

 (86.4)

 (31.1)

 165.5 

 (126.8)

 (70.8)

 (4.4)

 6.6 

 29.9 

 (93.5)

 (165.5)

11

 (54.5)

 (50.6)

 2.6 

 (3.5)

 — 

 (1.2)

 (57.8)

 — 

 (114.4)

 (11.6)

 31.8 

 20.2 

 1.6 

 (0.6)

 (4.1)

 (27.3)

 (30.2)

 96.6 

 (14.6)

 (14.6)

 46.4 

 31.8 

17

29

29

20

20

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

63

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Group statement of changes in equity
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

At 1 May 2011

Profit for the period

Other comprehensive income:

Actuarial gains on defined benefit pension 
schemes (net of tax)

Net loss on cash flow hedges (net of tax)

Total comprehensive income

Issue of ordinary share capital

Repurchase of shares

Share-based payments

Tax on share-based payments

Equity dividends paid

At 29 April 2012

Profit for the period

Other comprehensive income:

Actuarial losses on defined benefit pension 
schemes (net of tax)

Net loss on cash flow hedges (net of tax)

Total comprehensive income

Issue of ordinary share capital

Release of shares

Repurchase of shares

Share-based payments

Tax on share-based payments

Equity dividends paid

At 28 April 2013

Note

Share
capital
(note 26)
£m

27.1 

—

Share
premium
(note 27)
£m

Capital
redemption
(note 27)
£m

249.8 

— 

3.3 

— 

Hedging
reserve
(note 27)
£m

(84.0)

— 

Own
shares
(note 27)
£m

(9.0)

— 

Retained
earnings
(note 27)
£m

793.7 

102.4 

— 

— 

— 

0.1 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

1.5 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(66.4)

(66.4)

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

27.2 

—

251.3 

— 

3.3 

— 

(150.4)

— 

— 

— 

— 

0.1 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

2.5 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(9.8)

(9.8)

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

(0.6)

— 

— 

— 

(9.6)

— 

— 

— 

— 

— 

4.0 

(3.5)

— 

— 

— 

26

8

10

11

26

8

10

11

Total
£m

980.9 

102.4 

(26.2)

(66.4)

9.8 

1.6 

(0.6)

3.9 

0.3 

(26.2)

— 

76.2 

— 

— 

3.9 

0.3 

(50.6)

(50.6)

823.5 

98.3 

945.3 

98.3 

(13.1)

— 

85.2 

— 

(4.0)

—

3.9 

2.3 

(13.1)

(9.8)

75.4 

2.6 

— 

(3.5)

3.9 

2.3 

(54.5)

(54.5)

27.3 

253.8 

3.3 

(160.2)

(9.1)

856.4 

971.5 

64

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Notes to the accounts
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

1 Accounting policies
Corporate information
The consolidated financial statements of Greene King plc for the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013 were authorised for issue by the board of 
directors on 26 June 2013. Greene King plc is a public limited company incorporated and domiciled in England and Wales. The company’s 
shares are listed on the London Stock Exchange.

Statement of compliance
The group’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted 
by the EU as they apply to the financial statements of the group for the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013 (prior year 52 weeks ended 29 April 2012) 
and in accordance with the provisions of the Companies Act 2006.

Basis of preparation
The consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with those parts of the Companies Act 2006 applicable to 
companies reporting under IFRS. They are presented in pounds sterling, with values rounded to the nearest hundred thousand, except 
where otherwise indicated.

Basis of consolidation
The consolidated financial statements incorporate the financial statements of Greene King plc, its subsidiaries and its related party, 
Greene King Finance plc. Greene King Finance plc is a special purpose entity set up to raise bond finance for the group, which is consolidated 
as a quasi-subsidiary. The financial statements of subsidiaries are prepared for the same reporting year as the parent company with adjustments 
made to their financial statements to bring their accounting policies in line with those used by the group.

The results of subsidiaries are consolidated from the date of acquisition, being the date on which the group obtains control, and continue to be 
consolidated until the date that such control ceases. Intercompany transactions, balances, income and expenses are eliminated on consolidation.

Changes in accounting policies
The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the previous financial year.

The following amendments to standards are effective for this financial year but have not had a significant impact on the reported financial 
performance or position of the group.

IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures (Amendment) – Disclosures of transfer of financial assets
This amendment, effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 July 2011, requires additional quantitative and qualitative 
disclosures relating to transfers of financial assets.

IAS 12 Income Taxes – Recovery of underlying assets
The amendment, effective for financial years beginning on or after 1 January 2012, clarified the determination of deferred tax on investment 
property measured at fair value.

Significant accounting policies
Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost or deemed cost on transition to IFRS, less accumulated depreciation and any impairment in value.

Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of the asset. 

Freehold land is not depreciated. Freehold and long leasehold buildings are depreciated to their estimated residual values over periods 
up to 50 years, and short leasehold improvements are depreciated to their estimated residual values over the shorter of the remaining term 
of the lease or useful life of the asset. Residual value is reviewed at least at each financial year end and there is no depreciable amount if 
residual value is the same as, or exceeds, book value. Plant and equipment assets are depreciated over their estimated lives which range 
from three to 20 years.

Residual values, useful lives and methods of depreciation are reviewed for all categories of property, plant and equipment and adjusted, 
if appropriate, at each financial year end.

An item of property, plant and equipment is de-recognised upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected from its use. 
Profit or loss on de-recognition is calculated as the difference between the net disposal proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset, 
and is included in the income statement in the year of de-recognition.

Business combinations and goodwill
Business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method. The cost of an acquisition is measured as the aggregate of the consideration 
transferred, measured at acquisition date fair value and the amount of any non-controlling interest in the acquiree. The choice of measurement 
of non-controlling interest, either at fair value or at the proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets, is determined on a 
transaction by transaction basis. Acquisition costs incurred are taken to the income statement.

When the group acquires a business, it assesses the financial assets and liabilities assumed for appropriate classification and designation in 
accordance with the contractual terms, economic circumstances and pertinent conditions as at the acquisition date. This includes the separation 
of embedded derivatives in host contracts of the acquiree.

Any contingent consideration to be transferred to the acquirer will be recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Subsequent changes 
to the fair value of the contingent consideration which are deemed to be an asset or a liability will be recognised in accordance with IAS 39 
either in the income statement or in other comprehensive income. If the contingent consideration is classified as equity, it should not be 
re-measured until it is finally settled within equity.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

65

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
Business combinations and goodwill continued
Goodwill is initially measured at cost being the excess of the aggregate of the acquisition-date fair value of the consideration transferred 
and the amount recognised for the non-controlling interest over the net identifiable amounts of the assets acquired and liabilities assumed 
in exchange for the business combination. Assets acquired and liabilities assumed in transactions separate to the business combinations, 
such as the settlement of pre-existing relationships or post-acquisition remuneration arrangements, are accounted for separately from the 
business combination in accordance with their nature and applicable IFRS. Identifiable intangible assets, meeting either the contractual-legal 
or separability criterion, are recognised separately from goodwill. Contingent liabilities representing a present obligation are recognised 
if the acquisition-date fair value can be measured reliably.

If the aggregate of the acquisition-date fair value of the consideration transferred and the amount recognised for the non-controlling interest 
is lower than the fair value of the assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities and the fair value of any pre-existing interest held in the business 
acquired, the difference is recognised in the income statement.

After initial recognition, goodwill is measured at cost less any accumulated impairment losses.

Impairment
Property, plant and equipment
Individual assets are grouped for impairment assessment purposes at the lowest level at which there are identifiable cash inflows independent 
of the cash inflows of other groups of assets.

An assessment is made at each reporting date as to whether there is an indication of impairment. If an indication exists, the group makes 
an estimate of the recoverable amount of each asset group. An asset’s or cash-generating unit’s recoverable amount is the higher of its fair 
value less costs to sell and value-in-use and is determined for an individual asset, unless the asset does not generate cash inflows that are 
largely independent of those from other assets or groups of assets.

An impairment loss is recognised where the recoverable amount is lower than the carrying value of assets. If there is an indication that any 
previously recognised impairment losses may no longer exist or may have decreased, a reversal of the loss may be made only if there has been 
a change in the estimates used to determine the recoverable amounts since the last impairment loss was recognised. The carrying amount 
of the asset is increased to its recoverable amount only up to the carrying amount that would have resulted, net of depreciation, had no 
impairment loss been recognised for the asset in prior years.

Impairment losses and any subsequent reversals are recognised in the income statement.

Details of the impairment losses recognised in respect of property, plant and equipment are provided in note 14.

Goodwill 
Goodwill is reviewed for impairment annually or more frequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value 
may be impaired.

Impairment is determined by the recoverable amount of an operating segment. Where this is less than the carrying value of the operating 
segment an impairment loss is recognised immediately in the income statement. This loss cannot be reversed in future periods.

For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business combination is, from the acquisition date, allocated to each of the 
group’s cash-generating units (or groups of cash-generating units) that are expected to benefit from the combination, irrespective of whether 
other assets or liabilities of the acquiree are assigned to those units. Each unit or group of units to which goodwill is allocated represents 
the lowest level within the group at which goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes and cannot be larger than an operating 
segment before aggregation.

Where goodwill forms part of a cash-generating unit and part of the operation within that unit is disposed of, any goodwill associated with 
the operation disposed of is included in the carrying amount of the operation when determining the gain or loss on disposal of the operation. 
Goodwill disposed of in this circumstance is measured based on the relative values of the operation disposed of and the portion of the 
cash-generating unit retained.

Goodwill amortised prior to the conversion to IFRS on 3 May 2004 has not been reinstated and the net book value of goodwill at that date 
has been carried forward as the carrying value. Prior to May 1998, goodwill was written off to reserves. Such goodwill has not been reinstated 
and is not included in determining profit or loss on disposal.

Financial instruments
Financial instruments are recognised when the group becomes party to the contractual provisions of the instrument and are de-recognised 
when the group no longer controls the contractual rights that comprise the financial instrument, normally through sale or when all cash 
flows attributable to the instrument are passed to an independent third party.

Financial assets
Financial assets are classified as either financial assets at fair value through the income statement, loans and receivables, held-to-maturity 
investments or available-for-sale financial assets. The group determines the classification of its financial assets at initial recognition and, 
where appropriate, re-evaluates this designation at each financial year end.

The group makes trade loans to publicans who purchase the group’s beer. Trade loans are non-derivative and are not quoted in an active market 
and have therefore been designated as ‘Loans and receivables’, carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method. Gains and losses 
are recognised in income when the loans and receivables are de-recognised or impaired, as well as through the amortisation process.

The group assesses at each balance sheet date whether any individual trade loan is impaired. If there is evidence that an impairment loss 
has been incurred, the amount of loss is measured as the difference between the loan’s carrying amount and the expected future receipts, 
(excluding future credit losses that have not been incurred), discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate. The loss is recognised 
in operating profit. 

66

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
Trade receivables
Trade receivables are recorded at their original invoiced amount less an allowance for any doubtful amounts when collection of the full 
amount is no longer considered probable.

Inventories
Inventories are valued at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Raw materials are valued at average cost. Finished goods and work 
in progress comprise materials, labour and attributable production overheads where applicable, and are valued at average cost.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents in the balance sheet comprise cash at bank and in hand and short-term deposits with an original maturity of 
three months or less. For the consolidated cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents consist of cash and cash equivalents as defined 
above, net of outstanding bank overdrafts.

Property, plant and equipment held for sale
Property, plant and equipment is classified as held for sale only if it is available for sale in its current condition, management are committed to 
the sale and a sale is highly probable and expected to be completed within one year from the date of classification. Property, plant and equipment 
classified as held for sale is measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less costs to sell and is no longer depreciated or amortised.

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings 
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at fair value of the consideration received, net of issue costs. After initial recognition, 
interest-bearing loans and borrowings are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method. 

Finance costs and income
Finance costs are expensed to the income statement using the effective interest method. Finance income is recognised in the income 
statement using the effective interest method.

Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting
The group uses interest rate swaps to hedge its exposure to interest rate fluctuations on its variable rate loans, notes and bonds.

Interest rate swaps are initially measured at fair value, if any, and carried on the balance sheet as an asset or liability. Subsequent measurement 
is at fair value determined by reference to market values for similar instruments. If a derivative does not qualify for hedge accounting 
the gain or loss arising on the movement in fair value is recognised in the income statement.

Hedge accounting
To qualify for hedge accounting the hedge relationship must be designated and documented at inception. Documentation must include the 
group’s risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge and formal allocation to the item or transaction being hedged. 
The group also documents how it will assess the effectiveness of the hedge and carries out assessments on a regular basis to determine 
whether it has been, and is likely to continue to be, highly effective.

Hedges can be classified as either fair value (hedging exposure to changes in fair value of an asset or liability), or cash flow (hedging the 
variability in cash flows attributable to an asset, liability, or forecast transaction). The group uses its interest rate swaps as cash flow hedges.

Cash flow hedge accounting
The effective portion of the gain or loss on an interest rate swap is recognised directly in equity, whilst any ineffective portion is recognised 
immediately in the income statement.

Amounts taken to equity are transferred to the income statement in the same period that the financial income or expense is recognised, 
unless the hedged transaction results in the recognition of a non-financial asset or liability whereby the amounts are transferred to the 
initial carrying amount of the asset or liability.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised, or no longer qualifies for hedge accounting, amounts previously 
recognised in equity are held there until the previously hedged transaction affects profit or loss. If the hedged transaction is no longer 
expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss recognised in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.

Trade payables
Trade payables are non-interest bearing and are stated at their nominal value.

Provisions 
Provisions are recognised when the group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of a past event, when it is probable that 
an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation, and when a reliable estimate can be made of the amount of the obligation.

Provisions are discounted to present value, where the effect of the time value of money is material, using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current 
market estimates of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability. The amortisation of the discount is recognised as a finance cost.

Pensions and other post-employment benefits
Defined benefit pension schemes
The group operates a number of defined benefit pension schemes which require contributions to be made into separately administered funds. 
The cost of providing benefits under the schemes is determined separately for each plan using the projected unit credit actuarial method 
on an annual basis. The current service cost is charged to operating profit. Any actuarial gains and losses are recognised in full in the group 
statement of comprehensive income in the period in which they occur.

Past service costs are recognised in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the vesting period or immediately if the benefits have 
vested. When a settlement or curtailment occurs the obligation and related scheme assets are remeasured and the resulting gain or loss 
is recognised in the income statement in the same period.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

67

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
Pensions and other post-employment benefits continued
Defined benefit pension schemes continued
The interest cost on scheme liabilities and the expected return on scheme assets are shown as a net amount in the group income statement.

The defined benefit asset or liability recognised on the balance sheet comprises the present value of the schemes’ obligations less the fair 
value of scheme assets. Defined benefit assets are restricted to the extent that they are considered recoverable.

Defined contribution pension schemes
The cost of the group’s defined contribution pension schemes amounts to the value of contributions made. Contributions are charged 
to the income statement as they become payable.

Post‑employment healthcare benefits
The group also provided certain additional post-employment healthcare benefits to employees which are unfunded. The cost of providing 
these benefits is determined on an estimated accruals basis.

Share-based payments
Certain employees and directors receive equity-settled remuneration, whereby they render services in exchange for shares or rights over shares. 
The fair value of the shares and options granted are measured using a Black-Scholes model, at the date at which they were granted. No account 
is taken in the fair value calculation of any vesting conditions (service and performance), other than market conditions (performance linked 
to the price of the shares of the company). Any other conditions that are required to be met in order for an employee to become fully entitled 
to an award are considered non-vesting conditions. Like market performance conditions, non-vesting conditions are taken into account in 
determining the grant date fair value. The fair value of shares and options granted is recognised as an employee expense with a corresponding 
increase in equity spread over the period in which the vesting conditions are fulfilled ending on the relevant vesting date. The cumulative 
amount recognised as an expense reflects the extent to which the vesting period has expired, adjusted for the estimated number of shares 
and options that are ultimately expected to vest. The periodic charge or credit is the movement in the cumulative position from beginning 
to end of that period.

No expense is recognised for awards that do not ultimately vest provided vesting is not conditional on market or non-vesting conditions. 
The dilutive effect of outstanding options is reflected as additional share dilution in calculating earnings per share figures.

In accordance with the exemption allowed under IFRS 1 for first time adopters, no expense is recorded in respect of grants made under the 
above schemes prior to 7 November 2002 which had not vested by the date of transition to IFRS. However, later modifications of such equity 
instruments are measured using IFRS 2.

Own shares
Own shares consist of treasury shares and shares held within an employee benefit trust. The group has an employee benefit trust for the 
granting of shares to applicable employees.

Own shares are recognised at cost as a deduction from shareholders’ equity. Subsequent consideration received for the sale of such shares 
is also recognised in equity, with any difference between the sale proceeds from the original cost being taken to revenue reserves. No gain 
or loss is recognised in the performance statements on transactions in treasury shares. 

Revenue 
Generally, revenue represents external sales (excluding taxes) of goods and services, net of discounts. Revenue is recognised to the extent that 
it is probable that the economic benefits will flow to the group and is measured at the fair value of consideration receivable, excluding discounts, 
rebates, and other sales taxes or duty relating to brewing and packaging of certain products. Revenue principally consists of drink, food 
and accommodation sales, which are recognised at the point at which goods or services are provided, rental income, which is recognised 
on a straight-line basis over the lease term and machine income, where net takings are recognised as earned.

Operating leases 
Leases where the lessor retains substantially all the risks and benefits of ownership are classified as operating leases. Lease payments 
are recognised as an expense in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease.

Lease premiums paid on entering into or acquiring operating leases represent prepaid lease payments and are held on the balance sheet as current 
(the portion relating to the next financial period) or non-current prepayments. These are amortised on a straight-line basis over the lease term.

Taxes
Income tax
The income tax charge comprises both the income tax payable based on profits for the year and the deferred income tax. It is calculated 
using taxation rates enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and is measured at the amount expected to be recovered 
from or paid to the taxation authorities.

Income tax relating to items recognised directly in equity is recognised in equity and not in the income statement.

Deferred tax
Deferred tax is provided for using the liability method on temporary differences at the balance sheet date between the tax bases of assets 
and liabilities and their carrying values in the financial statements.

Deferred tax is recognised for all temporary differences except where the deferred tax arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or  of 
an asset or liability in a transaction that is not a business combination that, at the time of the transaction, affects neither the accounting profit nor 
taxable profit or loss or, in respect of taxable temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries, where the timing of the reversal 
of the temporary differences can be controlled and it is probable that the temporary differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future.

68

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting policies continued
Taxes continued
Deferred tax continued
Deferred tax assets are recognised for all deductible temporary differences and carry forward of unused tax losses only to the extent that 
it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which the deductible temporary differences and the carry forward of unused tax 
losses can be utilised.

The carrying amount of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer probable 
that sufficient taxable profit will be available to allow all or part of the deferred tax asset to be utilised. Unrecognised deferred tax assets 
are reassessed at each balance sheet date and are recognised to the extent that it has become probable that future taxable profit will allow 
the deferred tax asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured, on an undiscounted basis, at the tax rates that are expected to apply to the year when 
the asset is realised or the liability is settled, based on tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax relating to items recognised directly in equity is recognised in equity and not in the income statement.

Exceptional items
Exceptional items are defined as items of income or expense which, because of their nature, size or expected frequency, merit separate 
presentation to allow a better understanding of the financial performance in the period.

New standards and interpretations not applied
As at 28 April 2013 there are a number of standards and interpretations issued by the IASB and IFRIC with an effective date after the date 
of these financial statements and which have not been early adopted by the group. These are expected to be applied as follows: 

IAS 19 Employee Benefits (Revised)
The revisions eliminate the corridor approach and requires immediate recognition of all actuarial gains and losses in other comprehensive 
income, immediate recognition of all past service costs and the replacement of interest cost and expected return on plan assets with a net 
interest amount that is calculated by applying the discount rate to the net defined benefit liability/asset. The amendments are effective for 
accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2013. If the revised standard had been adopted at 28 April 2013 the group would have 
reported net pension finance costs of £2.5m rather than net finance income of £1.1m.

IFRS 7 Financial Instruments: Disclosures (Amendment) and IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation (Amendment)
The amendment to IAS 32, which is effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2014, clarifies some of the requirements 
for offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities on the group balance sheet. The amendment to IFRS 7, effective for accounting periods 
beginning on or after 1 January 2013, will affect disclosure only and has no impact on the group’s financial position or performance.

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments: Classification and Measurement
The standard is the first phase in the IASB’s work to replace IAS 39 and applies to the classification and measurement of financial instruments 
as defined in IAS 39. The Board’s work on other phases is on-going, and includes impairment of financial instruments and hedge accounting. 
This standard, effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2015, establishes two primary measurement categories for 
financial assets: i) amortised cost; and ii) fair value. The basis of classification depends on the entity’s business model and the contractual 
cash flow characteristics of the financial asset. In relation to liabilities the change in the fair value of a liability that relates to credit risk must 
be presented in other comprehensive income. The remainder of the change in fair value is presented in profit or loss, unless such presentation 
would create or enlarge the accounting mismatch in profit or loss. In subsequent phases, the IASB will address hedge accounting and 
derecognition. The group will quantify the effect in conjunction with the other phases, when issued, to present a comprehensive picture.

IFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities
The new standard, which is effective for accounting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2014, sets out the required disclosures for 
entities reporting under IFRS 10 and IFRS 11 that were previously included in IAS 27, IAS 28 and IAS 31. The standard includes disclosure 
requirements for all forms of interest in other legal entities, including subsidiaries joint arrangements, associates, special purpose vehicles 
and other off-balance sheet vehicles. The impact on the group is on disclosure in the consolidated financial statements only, where 
summarised information may need to be provided.

The following standards and interpretations are relevant to the group though they have been assessed as having no financial impact 
or additional disclosure requirements at this time:

 •  IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements;
 •   IFRS 11 Joint Arrangements;
 •   IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement;
 •   IAS 27 Separate Financial Statements (Revised);
 •   IAS 28 Associates and Joint Ventures (Amendment);
 •   IFRS 10, IFRS 12 and IAS 27 Investment Entities; and 
 •  Improvements to International Financial Reporting Standards (2009–2011 Cycle):

 • IAS 1 Presentation of Financial Statements;
 • IAS 16 Property, Plant and Equipment; and
 • IAS 32 Financial Instruments: Presentation.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

69

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

1 Accounting policies continued
Significant accounting judgments and estimates
The preparation of financial statements requires management to make judgments, estimates and assumptions in the application of accounting 
policies that affect reported amounts of assets and liabilities, income and expense. The group bases its estimates and judgments on historical 
experience and other factors deemed reasonable under the circumstances, including any expectations of future events. Actual results may 
differ from these estimates. The estimates and assumptions considered to be significant are detailed below:

Taxation 
Judgment is required when determining the provision for taxes as the tax treatment of some transactions cannot be finally determined until 
a formal resolution has been reached with the tax authorities. Assumptions are also made around the assets which qualify for capital allowances 
and the level of disallowable expenses and this affects the income tax calculation. Provisions are also made for uncertain exposures which 
can have an impact on both deferred and current tax. Tax benefits are not recognised unless it is probable that the benefit will be obtained 
and tax provisions are made if it is possible that a liability will arise. The final resolution of these transactions may give rise to material 
adjustments to the income statement and/or cash flow in future periods. The group reviews each significant tax liability or benefit each 
period to assess the appropriate accounting treatment.

Share-based payments
Judgment is required when calculating the fair value of awards made under the group’s share-based payment plans. Note 8 describes the 
key assumptions and valuation model inputs used in the determination of these values. In addition estimates are made of the number of 
awards that will ultimately vest, judgment is required in relation to the probability of meeting non-market based performance conditions 
and the continuing participation of employees in the plans.

Pension liabilities
The present values of pension liabilities are determined on an actuarial basis and depend on a number of actuarial assumptions which are 
disclosed in note 9. Any change in these assumptions will impact on the carrying amount of pension liabilities. Note 9 describes the key 
assumptions used in the accounting for retirement benefit obligations.

Impairment of goodwill
The group determines whether goodwill is impaired on at least an annual basis. Details of the tests and carrying value of the assets are shown 
in note 13. This requires an estimation of the value-in-use of the cash-generating units to which the goodwill is allocated. Value-in-use 
calculations require assumptions to be made regarding the expected future cash flows from the cash-generating unit and choice of a suitable 
discount rate in order to calculate the present value of those cash flows. If the actual cash flows are lower than estimated, future impairments 
may be necessary.

Impairment of property, plant and equipment
The group determines whether property, plant and equipment is impaired where there are indicators of impairment. This requires an 
estimation of the value-in-use at a site level. Value-in-use calculations require assumptions to be made regarding the expected future cash 
flows from the cash-generating unit and choice of a suitable discount rate in order to calculate the present value of those cash flows.

Note 14 describes the assumptions used in the impairment testing of property, plant and equipment together with an analysis of the sensitivity 
to changes in key assumptions.

Residual values 
Residual values of property are determined with reference to current market property trends. If residual values were lower than estimated, 
an impairment of asset value and reassessment of future depreciation charge may be required. Useful lives are reassessed annually which 
may lead to an increase or reduction in depreciation accordingly.

Business combinations
The group identifies separate assets and liabilities upon acquisition and recognises those assets at their fair value. The assessment of fair 
value, particularly for property, plant and equipment acquired, is undertaken with reference to current market conditions.

Note 17 describes the business combinations in the current year and provides details of the fair value adjustments made in arriving at the 
fair value of assets and liabilities acquired.

Property provisions
The group provides for its onerous obligations under operating leases where the property is closed or vacant and for properties where 
rental expense is in excess of income. The estimated timings and amounts of cash flows are determined using the experience of internal 
and external property experts. However, changes to the expected method of exiting from the obligation could lead to changes in the level 
of provision recorded.

70

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

2 Segment information
The group has determined the following three reportable segments that are largely organised and managed separately according 
to the nature of products and services provided, brands, distribution channels and profile of customers: 

Retail: Managed pubs and restaurants 

Pub Partners: Tenanted and leased pubs

Brewing & Brands: Brewing beer, marketing and selling

These are also considered to be the group’s operating segments and are based on the information presented to the chief executive 
who is considered to be the chief operating decision maker.

Transfer prices between operating segments are set on an arm’s length basis.

2013

Revenue
Operating costs

Segment operating profit

Exceptional items

Net finance costs

Income tax expense

Balance sheet

Segment assets

Unallocated assets*

Segment liabilities

Unallocated liabilities*

Net assets

Other segment information

Capital expenditure – tangible assets

Capital expenditure – business combinations

Goodwill disposed

Depreciation

EBITDA**

Retail
£m

 863.6 
 (695.9)

Pub
Partners
£m

 153.7 
 (85.6)

Brewing
& Brands
£m

 177.4 
 (147.4)

Corporate
£m

Total
 operations 
£m

 — 
 (17.6)

 1,194.7 
 (946.5)

 167.7 

 68.1 

 30.0 

 (17.6)

 248.2 

 (19.0)

 (114.4)

 (16.5)

 98.3

 1,885.6 

 794.2 

 370.6 

 44.8 

 3,095.2 

 107.4

 1,885.6 

 (91.2)

 794.2 

 (12.2)

 370.6 

 (66.2)

 44.8 

 3,202.6 

 (88.0)

 (257.6)

 (1,973.5)

 (91.2)

 (12.2)

 (66.2)

 (88.0)

 (2,231.1)

 1,794.4 

 782.0 

 304.4 

 (43.2)

 971.5 

 105.2 

 3.0 

 (0.2)

 44.6 

 212.3 

 16.5 

 — 

 (4.3)

 8.2 

 76.3 

 2.7 

 — 

 — 

 5.4 

 35.4 

 1.1 

 — 

 — 

 0.1 

 125.5 

 3.0 

 (4.5)

 58.3 

 (17.5)

 306.5 

*  Unallocated assets/liabilities comprise cash, borrowings, pensions, net deferred tax, net current tax, and derivatives.

**   EBITDA represents earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and exceptional items and is calculated as operating profit before exceptionals adjusted for the 

depreciation charge for the period.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

71

 
 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

2 Segment information continued

2012

Revenue
Operating costs

Segment operating profit
Exceptional items
Net finance costs
Income tax expense

Balance sheet
Segment assets
Unallocated assets*

Segment liabilities
Unallocated liabilities*

Net assets

Other segment information
Capital expenditure – tangible assets
Capital expenditure – business combinations
Goodwill acquired
Depreciation
EBITDA**

Retail
£m

 803.9 
 (654.3)

Pub
Partners
£m

 162.7 
 (90.5)

Brewing
& Brands
£m

 173.8 
 (140.8)

Corporate
£m

Total
 operations 
£m

 — 
 (18.6)

 1,140.4 
 (904.2)

 149.6 

 72.2 

 33.0 

 (18.6)

 1,823.5 

 841.0 

 374.2 

 41.9 

 1,823.5 
 (75.6)

 841.0 
 (13.3)

 374.2 
 (64.5)

 41.9 
 (85.8)

 236.2 
 (24.9)
 (86.2)
 (22.7)

 102.4

 3,080.6 
 107.4

 3,188.0 
 (239.2)
 (2,003.5)

 (75.6)

 (13.3)

 (64.5)

 (85.8)

 (2,242.7)

 1,747.9 

 827.7 

 309.7 

 (43.9)

 945.3 

 96.4 
 83.1 
 23.5 
 42.1 
 191.7 

 21.6 
 — 
 — 
 8.0 
 80.2 

 4.4 
 — 
 — 
 5.4 
 38.4 

 1.0 
 — 
 — 
 0.3 
 (18.3)

 123.4 
 83.1 
 23.5 
 55.8 
 292.0 

*  Unallocated assets/liabilities comprise cash, borrowings, pensions, net deferred tax, net current tax, and derivatives.

**   EBITDA represents earnings before interest, tax, depreciation and exceptional items and is calculated as operating profit before exceptionals adjusted 

for the depreciation charge for the period.

Management reporting and controlling systems
Management monitors the operating results of its strategic business units separately for the purpose of making decisions about allocating 
resources and assessing performance. Segment performance is measured based on segment operating profit or loss referred to as trading profit 
in our management and reporting systems. Included within the corporate column in the table above are functions managed by a central division.

No information about geographical regions has been provided as the group’s activities are predominantly domestic.

3 Revenue
Revenue is analysed as follows:

Goods
Services

2013
£m

2012
£m

 1,100.1 
 94.6 

 1,044.7 
 95.7 

 1,194.7 

 1,140.4 

72

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

 
 
4 Other income and expenses
Operating profit is stated after charging/(crediting):

2013

2012

Before
exceptional
items
£m

Exceptional
items
£m

 71.1 
 401.4 
 291.7 
 58.3 

 16.9 
 107.1 
 — 

 946.5 

 — 
 — 
 — 
 — 

 — 
 12.3 
 6.7 

 19.0 

Changes in inventory of finished goods and work in progress
Cost of products sold recognised as an expense
Employment costs (note 6)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment
Operating lease rentals
– minimum lease rentals
Other operating charges
Net loss/(profit) on disposal

Fees paid to the auditors during the period consisted of: 

Audit of the consolidated financial statements
Audit of subsidiaries

Included in other operating charges

5 Exceptional items

Included in operating profit
Financial systems integration and divisional restructuring
Acquisition and other related costs
Pension and post-employment liabilities credit 
Impairment of property, plant and equipment (note 14)
Impairment of property, plant and equipment resulting from fire damage (note 14)
Insurance proceeds (note 14)
Net loss/(profit) on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Other loss on disposal

Included in financing costs
Interest on tax adjustment in respect of prior periods
Ineffective cash flow hedges – transfer from equity (notes 24 and 32)

Total exceptional items before tax

Tax impact of exceptional items 
Tax credit in respect of the licensed estate
Tax credit in respect of rate change
Adjustment in respect of prior periods – income tax
Adjustment in respect of prior periods – deferred tax

Total exceptional tax

Total exceptional items after tax

Before
exceptional
items
£m

Exceptional
items
£m

Total
£m

 71.1 
 401.4 
 291.7 
 58.3 

 16.9 
 119.4 
 6.7 

 65.8 
 385.7 
 281.5 
 55.8 

 15.6 
 99.8 
 — 

 965.5 

 904.2 

 — 
 — 
 — 
 — 

 — 
 25.1 
 (0.2)

 24.9 

2013
£m

 0.2 
 0.1 

 0.3 

2013
£m

 — 
2.2
(8.4)
17.7
1.6
(0.8)
5.4
1.3

19.0

 — 
 28.2 

 47.2 

 (9.0)
 (7.5)
 (6.1)
 (20.8)
 21.0 

 (22.4)

 24.8 

Total
£m

 65.8 
 385.7 
 281.5 
 55.8 

 15.6 
 124.9 
 (0.2)

 929.1 

2012
£m

 0.2 
 0.1 

 0.3 

2012
£m

1.6
5.8
(4.4)
22.1
 — 
 — 
(0.2)
 — 

24.9

 2.0 
 — 

 26.9 

 (5.1)
 (4.3)
 (12.2)
 (0.5)
 6.8 

 (15.3)

 11.6 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

73

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

5 Exceptional items continued
Exceptional operating costs
Exceptional divisional restructuring and financial systems integration costs are items of one-off expenditure incurred in connection 
with the restructuring of certain trading divisions within the group and the review of group-wide financial systems.

Acquisition costs are items of one-off expenditure incurred in connection with acquisition of businesses in the year. These costs include legal 
and professional fees incurred by the group and stamp duty which in accordance with IFRS 3 (Revised) can no longer be included within 
the consideration for the acquisition and amount to £nil (2012: £3.3m). In addition acquisition costs include a charge of £2.2m (2012: £2.5m) 
in respect of amounts payable, two years post-acquisition and subject to the future profitability of the businesses, to the former owners 
of Cloverleaf Restaurants and Realpubs, respectively, who remained employees of the group.

Following the closure of the group’s defined benefit pension schemes to future accrual an exceptional credit of £8.4m has been recognised. 
This comprises a gain of £10.1m in respect of past service accruals no longer being linked to future salary growth less £1.7m of implementation 
costs and fees. The credit of £4.4m in the prior year is as a result of the curtailment of discretionary benefits provided to retired members 
of the main defined benefit pension scheme.

The net loss on disposal of property plant and equipment of £5.4m (2012: £0.2m profit) comprises a total profit on disposal of £6.9m (2012: £7.6m) 
and a total loss on disposal of £12.3m (2011: £7.4m). The loss on disposal includes £4.5m in respect of goodwill allocated to parts of operating 
segments disposed of in the year. The other loss on disposal of £1.3m relates to the loss on disposal of an investment in the year.

Exceptional tax 
The tax credit in respect of the licensed estate arises from movements in their base cost, including the impact of indexation.

The Finance Act 2012 reduced the rate of corporate tax from 24% to 23% from 1 April 2013. The effect of the change in tax rate is to reduce 
the deferred tax provision by a net £3.3m, comprising a credit to the group income statement of £6.1m and a debit to the group statement 
of comprehensive income of £2.8m.

The adjustment in respect of prior periods’ income tax arises from finalising the tax returns for earlier periods including tax relief 
for capital expenditure and repairs.

The adjustment in respect of prior periods’ deferred tax arises from finalising the tax returns and also deferred tax on revaluation and rolled 
over gains on the licensed estate.

6 Employment costs

Wages and salaries
Other share-based payments (note 8)

Total wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs (note 9)
– defined benefit
– defined contribution

The total expense of share-based payments relates to equity-settled schemes.

The average number of employees during the period was as follows:

Retail
Pub Partners
Brewing & Brands
Corporate

The figures above include 9,819 (2012: 8,281) part-time employees.

Details of directors’ emoluments are shown in the directors’ remuneration report on pages 50 to 53. 

2013
£m

 265.1 
 3.9 

 269.0 
 18.8 

 1.7 
 2.2 

2012
£m

 254.1 
 3.9 

 258.0 
 17.4 

 4.2 
 1.9 

 291.7 

 281.5 

2013

2012

 21,127 
 61 
 832 
 412 

 20,704 
 153 
 829 
 398 

 22,432 

 22,084 

74

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

7 Finance (costs)/income

2013

2012

Bank loans and overdrafts
Other loans 
Ineffective cash flow hedges – transfer from equity (note 24)
Interest on tax adjustment in respect of prior period

Before
exceptional
items
£m

Exceptional
items
£m

 (9.3)
 (77.9)
 — 
—

 — 
 — 
 (28.2)
 — 

Total
£m

 (9.3)
 (77.9)
 (28.2)
 — 

Total finance costs

 (87.2)

 (28.2) 

 (115.4)

Before
exceptional
items
£m

Exceptional
items
£m

 (8.4)
 (78.7)
—
 — 

 (87.1)

 (0.4)
 2.3 

 1.9 

 1.0 

 1.0 

 — 
 — 
— 
 (2.0)

 (2.0)

 — 
 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

Total
£m

 (8.4)
 (78.7)
— 
 (2.0)

 (89.1)

 (0.4)
 2.3 

 1.9 

 1.0 

 1.0 

 (0.5)
 1.1 

 0.6 

 0.4 

 0.4 

 — 
 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 (0.5)
 1.1 

 0.6 

 0.4 

 0.4 

 (86.2)

 (28.2) 

 (114.4)

 (84.2)

 (2.0)

 (86.2)

Unwinding of discount element of provisions
Net finance income from pensions

Other net finance income

Bank interest receivable

Total finance income

Net finance costs

8 Share-based payment plans
The group operates three types of share-based payment arrangements: a senior management long-term incentive plan (LTIP), a deferred 
share bonus scheme for senior executives and a general employee share option plan (SAYE). 

The general terms of each plan are detailed in the directors’ remuneration report on pages 46 to 54. All are equity-settled. 

The total charge recognised for the period arising from share-based payment transactions including National Insurance contributions 
is £5.0m (2012: £4.4m). A corresponding credit of £3.9m (2012: £3.9m) has been recognised in equity.

The fair value of equity-settled options and LTIP contingently issued shares are estimated using a Black-Scholes model. The fair value 
of the grants and model inputs used to calculate the fair values of grants during the period were as follows:

2013

Weighted average share price
Exercise price
Expected dividend yield
Risk-free rate of return
Volatility
Expected life (years)
Weighted average fair value of grants in the year

2012

Weighted average share price
Exercise price
Expected dividend yield
Risk-free rate of return
Volatility
Expected life (years)
Weighted average fair value of grants in the year

LTIP

 SAYE 

596p
— 
4.5%
0.2%
23.8%
3.0
521p

708p
505p
3.8%
0.6%
22.0%
3.3
168p

LTIP

 SAYE 

455p
 — 
4.9%
1.4%
42.9%
3.0
393p

522p
387p
4.9%
0.6%
33.2%
3.3
133p

Risk-free rate of return is the yield on zero coupon UK government bonds with the same life as the expected option life. Expected volatility 
is based on historical volatility of the company’s share price which assumes that the past trend in share price movement is indicative of 
future trends. Expected life of options has been taken as the mid-point of the relevant exercise period. This is not necessarily indicative 
of future exercise patterns.

No other feature of the equity instruments granted was incorporated into the fair value measurement.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

75

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

8 Share-based payment plans continued
Movement in outstanding options and rights during the period is as follows:

ESOS

Outstanding at the beginning of the period
Forfeited
Exercised

Outstanding at the end of the period

Exercisable at the end of the period

SAYE

Outstanding at the beginning of the period
Granted
Forfeited
Exercised

Outstanding at the end of the period

Exercisable at the end of the period

LTIP

Outstanding at the beginning of the period
Granted
Forfeited
Vested

Outstanding at the end of the period

Exercisable at the end of the period

 Number of options

Weighted average
exercise price

2013
m

 1.0 
— 
 (0.4)

 0.6 

0.6

2012
m

 2.6 
 (1.5)
 (0.1)

 1.0 

1.0

2013
p

451
528
412

472

472

2012
p

451
452
381

451

451

 Number of options

Weighted average
exercise price

2013
m

2.0
0.6
 (0.3)
 (0.5)

 1.8 

0.4

2012
m

2.0
0.8
 (0.3)
 (0.5)

 2.0 

0.4

2013
p

363
507
407
336

400

308

2012
p

335
387
375
282

363

324

Number of shares

2013
m

2.9
0.9
 (0.3)
 (0.8)

 2.7 

 — 

2012
m

2.3
1.1
 (0.5)
 — 

 2.9 

 — 

The options and shares granted under the LTIP are at nil cost therefore the weighted average exercise price for rights outstanding 
at the beginning and end of the period, granted, forfeited and exercised during the period is £nil (2012: £nil).

ESOS, SAYE and LTIP
Options were exercised on a range of dates. The weighted average share price through the period was 607p in 2013 and 483p in 2012.

The rights outstanding at 28 April 2013 under the LTIP had an exercise price of £nil (2012: £nil) and a weighted average remaining 
contractual life of 1.3 years (2012: 1.4 years). 

The outstanding options for the ESOS scheme had an exercise price between 332p and 528p (2012: 296p – 528p) and for the SAYE scheme 
between 274p and 505p (2012: 274p and 694p).

The weighted average remaining contractual life was 1.8 years for the ESOS (2012: 2.6 years) and 2.8 years for the SAYE scheme (2012: 3.0 years).

Deferred share bonus scheme
Selected senior executives participate in a deferred share bonus scheme. Awards made under this scheme are based on a percentage of 
salary and are paid in shares. Awards are made to eligible employees on the achievement of corporate targets and vest once required sevice 
periods are completed. During the year 0.05m (2012: 0.12m) shares were purchased to fulfil awards made in 2011/12 under this scheme.

76

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

9 Pensions
The group maintains a defined contribution scheme, which is open to all new employees, and three defined benefit schemes.

The group also has a past service liability in relation to post-employment medical benefits offered to employees to cover any medical costs 
after employment. The benefit is no longer given to new employees.

Defined contribution pension scheme
Member funds for the defined contribution scheme are held and administered by the Prudential Assurance Company. The total cost 
recognised in operating profit for the period was £2.2m (2012: £1.9m).

Defined benefit pension schemes and post-employment benefits
The group maintains the following defined benefit schemes which are all closed to new entrants and were closed to future accrual during 
the year. All schemes have had full actuarial valuations in the last three years: Greene King Pension Scheme (last valued as at 5 April 2012), 
Belhaven Pension Scheme (last valued as at 4 May 2011), and the Hardys & Hansons Pension Scheme (last valued as at 30 April 2012).

Member funds for the defined benefit schemes are held in separate funds independently of the group’s finances and are administered 
by pension trustees. Pension benefits are related to members’ final salary at retirement and their length of service.

The group has opted to recognise all actuarial gains and losses immediately via the statement of comprehensive income.

The total cost recognised in the income statement was:

Current service cost
Curtailments

Total recognised in operating profit

Expected return on pension scheme assets
Interest on scheme liabilities

Total finance income/(cost) recognised

Pension schemes

Post-employment benefits

2013
£m

 (1.7)
 10.1 

 8.4 

 14.8 
 (13.7)

 1.1 

2012
 £m 

 (4.2)
 — 

 (4.2)

 17.6 
 (15.0)

 2.6 

2013
£m

 — 
 — 

 — 

 — 
 — 

 — 

2012
 £m 

 — 
 4.4 

 4.4 

 — 
 (0.3)

 (0.3)

During the year the group defined benefit schemes were closed to future accrual with a credit of £10.1m being recognised as a consequence 
of past service accruals no longer being linked to future salary growth. The credit in the prior year relates to a curtailment of discretionary 
post-employment benefits provided to retired members of the main defined benefit pension scheme.

The total charge recognised in the statement of comprehensive income was:

Actual return on scheme assets
Less: expected return on scheme assets

Experience gains and losses on scheme assets
Experience gains arising on scheme liabilities
Losses arising on scheme liabilities due to changes in actuarial assumptions

Actuarial loss recognised through equity

Pension schemes

Post-employment benefits

2013
£m

 42.5 
 (14.8)

 27.7 
 5.4 
 (49.2)

 (16.1)

2012
 £m 

 (1.9)
 (17.6)

 (19.5)
 2.4 
 (16.0)

 (33.1)

2013
£m

2012
 £m 

 — 
 — 

 — 
 — 
 — 

 — 

 — 
 — 

 — 
 — 
 — 

 — 

The total contributions to the defined benefit pension schemes in the following period are expected to be £7.3m (2012: £12.9m) for the group.

The values of the schemes’ liabilities have been determined by a qualified actuary based on the results of the last actuarial valuation, 
updated to 28 April 2013 using the following principal actuarial assumptions: 

Discount rate
Expected rates of salary increases
Expected pension payment increases
Rate of inflation (RPI)
Rate of inflation (CPI)
Healthcare cost increase

The mortality assumptions imply the following expectations of years of life from age 65:
Man currently aged 40
Woman currently aged 40
Man currently aged 65
Woman currently aged 65

2013

3.9%
— 
3.1%
3.2%
2.5%
9.0%

 24.0 
 26.4 
 22.3 
 24.5 

2012

4.7%
4.0%
2.9%
3.0%
2.3%
9.0%

 23.6 
 26.2 
 21.2 
 24.0 

Mortality assumptions are based on standard tables adjusted for scheme experience and with an allowance for future improvement in life 
expectancy. Overall expected rate of return on assets is established by applying brokers’ forecasts to each category of scheme asset.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

77

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

9 Pensions continued
Defined benefit pension schemes and post-employment benefits continued
The table below shows the investment allocation of pension assets against the related liabilities of the pension schemes and other 
post-employment benefits:

Equities
With profits
Bonds
Property
Cash

Fair value of assets
Present value of scheme liabilities
Funded plans
Unfunded plans

Non-current liability recognised

Pension plans

Long-term rate
of return expected

Value

2013
%

6.7
3.9
3.6
6.7
0.5

2012
%

7.1
4.6
4.2
7.1
0.5

2013
£m

 207.6 
 2.7 
 64.5 
 — 
 5.5 

 280.3 

2012
£m

 176.6 
 2.3 
 53.9 
 0.3 
 4.2 

 237.3 

Post-employment
benefits

2013
£m

2012
£m

 — 
 — 
 — 
 — 
 — 

 — 

 — 
 — 
 — 
 — 
 — 

 — 

 — 
 (1.5)

 (1.5)

 (344.1)
 — 

 (304.6)
 — 

 (63.8)

 (67.3)

 — 
 (1.5)

 (1.5)

The movements in the pension schemes’ net liability and post-employment benefits liability during the period are as follows:  

At beginning of period

Current service cost

Interest cost on benefit obligations

Expected return on plan assets

Contributions paid – employers

Contributions paid – employees

Settlements and curtailments (note 5)

Benefits paid
Actuarial gain/(loss)

At end of period

At beginning of period

Interest cost on benefit obligations

Settlements and curtailments (note 5)
Benefits paid

At end of period

Pension assets

Pension liabilities

Net pension liability

2013
£m

2012
£m

2013
£m

2012
£m

 237.3 

 234.8 

 (304.6)

 (280.5)

 — 

 — 

 14.8 

 10.1 

 0.4 

 — 

 (10.0)
 27.7 

 — 

 — 

 17.6 

 13.1 

 0.8 

 — 

 (9.5)
 (19.5)

 (1.7)

 (13.7)

 — 

 — 

 (0.4)

 10.1 

 10.0 
 (43.8)

 (4.2)

 (15.0)

 — 

 — 

 (0.8)

 — 

 9.5 
 (13.6)

2013
£m

 (67.3)

 (1.7)

 (13.7)

 14.8 

 10.1 

 — 

 10.1 

 — 
 (16.1)

 280.3 

 237.3 

 (344.1)

 (304.6)

 (63.8)

2012
£m

 (45.7)

 (4.2)

 (15.0)

 17.6 

 13.1 

 — 

 — 

 — 
 (33.1)

 (67.3)

Post-employment
benefits liability

2013
£m

 (1.5)

 — 

 — 
 — 

 (1.5)

2012
£m

 (5.7)

 (0.3)

 4.4 
 0.1 

 (1.5)

78

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

9 Pensions continued
Defined benefit pension schemes and post-employment benefits continued
History of experience adjustments for the current and previous four periods is as follows:

Pension schemes

Defined benefit obligation

Plan assets

Deficit

Experience adjustments on scheme liabilities

Percentage of scheme liabilities

Experience adjustments on scheme assets
Percentage of scheme assets

Post-employment benefits

Benefit obligation

Experience adjustments on benefit obligation

2013
£m

 (344.1)

 280.3 

 (63.8)

 5.4 

(1.6%)

 27.7 
9.9%

2013
£m

 (1.5)

 — 

2012
£m

2011
£m

2010
£m

2009
£m

 (304.6)

 (280.5)

 (284.3)

 (251.3)

 237.3 

 234.8 

 205.6 

 (67.3)

 (45.7)

 (78.7)

 2.4 

 0.7 

(0.8%)

(0.2%)

 4.1 

(1.4%)

 159.7 

 (91.6)

 2.6 

(1.0%)

 (19.5)
(8.2%)

 10.4 
4.4%

 37.9 
18.4%

 (53.3)
(33.4%)

2012
£m

 (1.5)

 — 

2011
£m

 (5.7)

 — 

2010
£m

 (5.6)

 — 

2009
£m

 (5.5)

 — 

The cumulative amount of actuarial gains and losses recognised since 3 May 2004 in the statement of comprehensive income is a £43.2m 
loss (2012: £27.1m). The amount prior to 3 May 2004 is not determinable as valuations were performed under different accounting and 
actuarial bases.

The sensitivities regarding the principal assumptions used to measure the scheme liabilities are set out below:

0.25% points increase in discount rate

0.25% points increase in inflation assumption

Additional one-year increase to life expectancy

10  Taxation

Consolidated income statement

Income tax

Corporation tax before exceptional items

Recoverable on exceptional items

Current income tax 

Adjustment in respect of prior periods

Deferred tax

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

Adjustment in respect of prior periods

Tax credit in respect of rate change

Tax charge in the income statement

(Increase)/decrease 
in liability 

2013 
£m 

 15.8 

 (13.9)

 (10.1)

2012

Before
exceptional
items
£m

Exceptional
items
£m

 38.1 

 — 

 38.1 

 (1.8)

 36.3 

 1.7 

 — 

 — 

 1.7 

 38.0 

 — 

 (0.9)

 (0.9)

 (0.5)

 (1.4)

 (8.5)

 6.8 

 (12.2)

 (13.9)

 (15.3)

2012
 £m 

 13.1 

 (13.1)

 (8.4)

Total
£m

 38.1 

 (0.9)

 37.2 

 (2.3)

 34.9 

 (6.8)

 6.8 

 (12.2)

 (12.2)

 22.7 

2013

Before
exceptional
items
£m

Exceptional
items
£m

 42.5 

 — 

 42.5 

 — 

 (0.4)

 (0.4)

 — 

 (20.8)

Total
£m

 42.5 

 (0.4)

 42.1 

 (20.8)

 42.5 

 (21.2)

 21.3 

 (3.6)

 — 

 — 

 (3.6)

 38.9 

 (16.1)

 21.0 

 (6.1)

 (1.2)

 (22.4)

 (19.7)

 21.0 

 (6.1)

 (4.8)

 16.5 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

79

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

10 Taxation continued

Group statement of comprehensive income

Deferred tax

Loss on actuarial valuation of pension liability

Net loss on revaluation on cash flow hedges

Tax charge in respect of rate change

Group statement of changes in equity

Deferred tax

Share-based payment – future taxable benefit

Tax charge in respect of rate change

Deferred tax reported in equity

Income tax
Share-based payments – current taxable benefit

Total tax reported in equity

Reconciliation of income tax expense for period
The effective rate of taxation is lower than the full rate of corporation tax. The differences are explained below:

Profit before tax

Profit before tax multiplied by standard rate corporation tax 23.9% (2012: 25.8%)

Effects of:

Expenses not deductible for tax purposes

Exceptional tax credit in respect of the licensed estate

Exceptional tax credit in respect of rate change

Adjustment in respect of prior periods – income tax

Adjustment in respect of prior periods – deferred tax charge

Income tax expense reported in the income statement

Deferred tax
The deferred tax included in the balance sheet is as follows: 

Deferred tax liability

Accelerated capital allowances

Rolled over gains and property revaluation

Deferred tax asset

Pensions and post-employment medical benefits

Other accruals and deferred income

Derivatives

Share-based payment

Tax losses carried forward

Net deferred tax liability

2013
£m

2012
£m

 (3.7)

 (2.4)

 2.7 

 (3.4)

2013
£m

 (1.9)

 0.1 

 (1.8)

 (0.5)

 (2.3)

2013
£m

 114.8 

 27.4 

 2.5 

 (7.5)

 (6.1)

 (20.8)

 21.0 

 16.5 

 (7.9)

 (20.3)

 3.2 

 (25.0)

2013
£m

 (0.3)

 0.2 

 (0.1)

 (0.2)

 (0.3)

2012
£m

 125.1 

 32.3 

 2.4 

 (4.3)

 (12.2)

 (2.3)

 6.8 

 22.7 

2013
£m

2012
£m

49.7 

96.8 

146.5 

(14.9)

(2.4)

(54.0)

(5.0)

(0.1)

(76.4)

70.1 

47.1 

103.6 

150.7 

(16.4)

(2.7)

(47.1)

(2.4)

(2.0)

(70.6)

80.1 

80

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

10 Taxation continued
Deferred tax continued
The deferred tax included in the income statement is as follows: 

2013

2012

Before
exceptional
items
£m

Exceptional
items
£m

Before
exceptional
items
£m

Exceptional
items
£m

Total
£m

Deferred tax in the income statement

Accelerated capital allowances

Rolled over gains and property revaluations

Pensions and post-employment medical benefit

Other accruals and deferred income

Derivatives

Share-based payments

Tax losses carried forward

Deferred tax expense

(5.0)

— 

2.2 

— 

— 

(0.8)

— 

(3.6)

7.6 

(6.8)

2.3 

0.3 

(6.5)

— 

1.9 

(1.2)

2.6 

(6.8)

4.5 

0.3 

(6.5)

(0.8)

1.9 

(4.8)

(1.1)

— 

2.7 

— 

— 

(0.4)

0.5 

1.7 

The movements on deferred tax assets and liabilities during the period are shown below:

Total
£m

(5.0)

(11.4)

3.8 

0.2 

— 

(0.4)

0.6 

(3.9)

(11.4)

1.1 

0.2 

— 

— 

0.1 

(13.9)

(12.2)

Accelerated
capital
allowances
£m

Rolled over
gains and
property
revaluation
£m

51.4 

(5.0)

0.7 

47.1 

2.6 

111.7 

(11.4)

3.3 

103.6 

(6.8)

Total
£m

163.1 

(16.4)

4.0 

150.7 

(4.2)

49.7 

96.8 

146.5 

Pensions
and post-
employment
medical
benefits
£m

Other
accruals
and
deferred
income
£m

Derivatives
£m

Share-
based
payments
£m

(13.3)

(6.9)

3.8 

—

(16.4)

(3.0)

4.5 

(14.9)

(2.9)

—

0.2 

—

(2.7)

—

0.3 

(29.0)

(18.1)

—

—

(47.1)

(0.4)

(6.5)

(1.9)

(0.1)

(0.4)

—

(2.4)

(1.8)

(0.8)

Taxes
losses
carried
forward
£m

(1.6)

—

0.6 

(1.0)

(2.0)

—

1.9 

Total
£m

(48.7)

(25.1)

4.2 

(1.0)

(70.6)

(5.2)

(0.6)

(2.4)

(54.0)

(5.0)

(0.1)

(76.4)

Deferred tax liabilities

At 1 May 2011

Credit to the income statement

Acquired

At 29 April 2012

Credit to the income statement

At 28 April 2013

Deferred tax assets

At 1 May 2011

Credit to equity/comprehensive income

Charge/(credit) to the income statement

Acquired

At 29 April 2012

Credit to equity/comprehensive income

Charge/(credit) to the income statement

At 28 April 2013

There are no income tax consequences attaching to the payment of dividends by Greene King plc to its shareholders. 

Factors that may affect future tax charges 
In addition to the reduction in the rate of corporation tax from 24% to 23% during the period it is proposed to reduce the rate to 21% 
from 1 April 2014 and to 20% from 1 April 2015. These further reductions had not been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date 
and consequently are not included in these financial statements. The effect of these proposals would be to reduce the deferred tax liability 
by a further £9.1m.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

81

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

11 Dividends paid and proposed

Declared and paid in the period

Interim dividend for 2013 – 7.15p (2012: 6.7p)

Final dividend for 2012 – 18.1p (2011: 16.8p)

Proposed for approval at AGM
Final dividend for 2013 – 19.45p (2012: 18.1p)
Total proposed dividend for 2013 – 26.6p (2012: 24.8p)

Dividends on own shares have been waived.

2013
£m

2012
£m

15.5 

 39.0 

 54.5 

 42.4 
 57.9 

 14.4 

 36.2 

 50.6 

 39.0 
 53.4 

12 Earnings per share
Basic earnings per share has been calculated by dividing the profit attributable to equity holders of £98.3m (2012: £102.4m) by the weighted 
average number of shares in issue during the period (excluding own shares held) of 216.1m (2012: 215.0m).  

Diluted earnings per share has been calculated on a similar basis taking account of 1.3m (2012: 0.6m) dilutive potential shares under option, giving 
a weighted average number of ordinary shares adjusted for the effect of dilution of 217.4m (2012: 215.6m). Share options granted over 0.0m shares 
(2012: 0.5m) have not been included in the diluted earnings per share calculation because they are anti-dilutive at the year end. The performance 
conditions for share options granted over 2.8m (2012: 2.9m) shares have not been met in the current financial period and therefore the dilutive effect 
of the number of shares which would have been issued at the period end has not been included in the diluted earnings per share calculation. 

Adjusted earnings per share excludes the effect of exceptional items and is presented to show the underlying performance of the group 
on both a basic and dilutive basis.

Adjusted earnings per share

Profit attributable to equity holders

Exceptional items

Profit attributable to equity holders before exceptional items

Earnings

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings
per share

2013
£m

 98.3 

 24.8 

 123.1 

2012
£m

 102.4 

 11.6 

 114.0 

2013
p

 45.5 

 11.5 

 57.0 

2012
p

 47.6 

 5.4 

 53.0 

2013
p

 45.2 

 11.4 

 56.6 

2012
p

 47.5 

 5.4 

 52.9 

Treasury shares and shares held by the EBT are excluded from the calculation of weighted average number of shares in issue. 

13 Goodwill

Cost

At 1 May 2011

Acquired through business combinations (note 17)

At 29 April 2012

Disposal

At 28 April 2013

£m

705.8 

23.5 

729.3 

(4.5)

724.8 

All goodwill was purchased as part of business combinations. As from 3 May 2004, the date of transition to IFRS, goodwill is no longer 
amortised but is subject to annual impairment testing.

Goodwill has been allocated to operating segments, the lowest group of cash-generating units in the group at which goodwill is monitored 
internally, based on the extent that the benefits of acquisitions flow to that segment.

Goodwill disposed of in the year is the amount of goodwill allocated to parts of operating segments disposed of during the year. The amount 
disposed is calculated based on the relative value of the operation disposed and the portion of the operating segment retained. 

The carrying amount of goodwill has been allocated £353.8m (2012: £354.0m) to Retail, £156.5m (2012: £160.8m) to Pub Partners, and £214.5m 
(2012: £214.5m) to Brewing & Brands.

The recoverable amount of each segment was determined on a value-in-use basis, using cash flow projections based on one-year budgets 
approved by the board, and in all cases exceeded the carrying amount. 

The key assumptions used in the value-in-use calculations are budgeted EBITDA, the pre-tax discount rate and the growth rate used 
to extrapolate cash flows beyond the budgeted period.

Budgeted EBITDA is based on past experience adjusted to take account of the impact of expected changes to each cash-generating unit’s 
pub estate or operations, sales prices and volumes, capital expenditure, business mix and margin. 

Cash flows are discounted at 9.0% (2012: 9.0%) which is used as an approximation for the risk-adjusted discount rate of the relevant 
operating segment. A growth rate of 2.0% (2012: 2.0%) has been used to extrapolate cash flows. The growth rate is considered a conservative 
rate and is below the long-term average growth rate for the industry. 

82

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

 
13 Goodwill continued
Sensitivity to changes in assumptions
The calculation is most sensitive to changes in the assumptions used for budgeted cash flow, pre-tax discount rate and growth rate. 
Management consider that reasonable possible changes in assumptions would be an increase in discount of 1% point, a reduction in growth 
rate of 1% point or a 10% reduction in budgeted cash flow. As an indication of sensitivity, when applied to the value-in-use calculation none 
of these changes would have  resulted in an impairment of goodwill in the period.

14 Property, plant and equipment

Cost

Balances at 1 May 2011

Additions during period

Acquisitions (note 17)

Transfer to property, plant and equipment held for sale

Disposals during period

Balances at 29 April 2012

Additions during period

Acquisitions (note 17)

Transfer to property, plant and equipment held for sale

Disposals during period

Balances at 28 April 2013

Depreciation and impairment
Balances at 1 May 2011
Written back on disposals

Transfer to property, plant and equipment held for sale

Provided during the year

Impairment (see below)

Balances at 29 April 2012

Written back on disposals

Transfer to property, plant and equipment held for sale

Provided during the year

Impairment (see below)

Balances at 28 April 2013

Net book value

At 28 April 2013

At 29 April 2012

At 1 May 2011

Licensed estate

Other

Land and
buildings
£m

Plant and
equipment
£m

Land and
buildings
£m

Plant and
equipment
£m

 Total 
£m

1,935.8 

519.3 

70.8 

83.1 

(7.0)

(24.0)

2,058.7 

75.3 

2.9 

(8.3)

(34.6)

47.1 

— 

(1.3)

(8.0)

557.1 

46.4 

0.1 

(1.2)

(5.3)

2,094.0 

597.1 

114.8 
(1.5)

(1.5)

0.3 

22.1 

134.2 

(14.9)

(0.3)

7.0 

19.3 

343.5 
(5.3)

(0.6)

49.8 

— 

387.4 

(2.8)

(0.8)

45.8 

— 

60.1 

0.2 

— 

— 

(0.1)

60.2 

2.2 

— 

— 

(0.6)

61.8 

8.3 
— 

— 

0.4 

— 

8.7 

(0.1)

— 

2.2 

— 

113.9 

2,629.1 

5.3 

— 

— 

(1.7)

123.4 

83.1 

(8.3)

(33.8)

117.5 

2,793.5 

1.6 

— 

— 

— 

125.5 

3.0 

(9.5)

(40.5)

119.1 

2,872.0 

67.6 
(1.0)

— 

5.3 

— 

534.2 
(7.8)

(2.1)

55.8 

22.1 

71.9 

602.2 

— 

— 

3.3 

— 

(17.8)

(1.1)

58.3 

19.3 

145.3 

429.6 

10.8 

75.2 

660.9 

1,948.7 

1,924.5 

1,821.0 

167.5 

169.7 

175.8 

51.0 

51.5 

51.8 

43.9 

45.6 

46.3 

2,211.1 

2,191.3 

2,094.9 

The licensed estate relates to properties, and assets held within those properties, licensed to trade (ie managed, tenanted and leased houses).

Other assets relate to property, plant and equipment associated with unlicensed properties (ie brewing, distribution and central assets).

The net book value of land and buildings comprises:

Freehold properties

Leasehold properties >50 years unexpired term

Leasehold properties <50 years unexpired term

2013
£m

2012
£m

1,906.0 

1,880.8 

58.3 

35.4 

59.5 

35.7 

1,999.7 

1,976.0 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

83

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

14 Property, plant and equipment continued
Valuation
The licensed estate properties were valued by the group’s own professionally qualified chartered surveyors, as at 20 December 2003, 
on the basis of existing use value, in accordance with the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors’ Appraisal and Valuation Standards. 
A representative sample of properties was also valued by external valuers, Gerald Eve Chartered Surveyors and Property Consultants, 
who confirmed that the values were consistent with their appraisal. Frozen revaluation has been taken as deemed cost on the transition 
to IFRS, therefore no historic cost analysis is provided.

Up to 1999 the brewery and depots were valued at depreciated replacement cost and other properties at open market value. These valuations 
have been retained but they have not been updated. Subsequent additions have been included at cost or, in the case of acquisitions, at fair value.

Charges over assets
Included in land and buildings are properties with a net book value of £1,437.7m (2012: £1,433.9m) over which there is a first charge 
in favour of the securitised debt holders as detailed in note 23.

Future capital expenditure

Contracted for

2013
£m

7.7 

2012
£m

9.9 

Impairment of property, plant and equipment
During the year £19.3m of impairment losses (2012: £22.1m) were recognised in the income statement as exceptional costs. 
These are analysed between the group’s principal reporting segments as shown below.

£1.6m of the impairment recognised in the year for within the Retail estate is in respect of licensed properties damaged by fire. 
In the period the group has received £0.8m of insurance compensation to meet the costs incurred to date of restoring these properties; 
further compensation is expected to be received as the restoration projects progress.

Retail

Pub Partners

2013
£m

 3.8 

 15.5 

19.3 

2012
£m

 2.5 

 19.6 

22.1 

The group considers that each of its individual pubs is a cash-generating unit (CGU). Each CGU is reviewed annually for indicators 
of impairment. When indicators of impairment are identified the carrying value of the CGU is compared to its recoverable amount. 
The recoverable amount is the higher of the CGU’s fair value less costs to sell and its value-in-use.

The group estimates value-in-use using a discounted cash flow model. The key assumptions used are the discount rate applied to cash flow 
projections of 9% (2012: 9%) and the projected cash flows extrapolated using an average growth rate of 2% (2012: 2%) which is below the 
long-term average growth rate for the industry. Other commercial assumptions relating to individual CGUs have been made based on 
historic trends adjusted for management’s estimates of medium-term trading prospects.

Estimates of fair value less costs to sell are based on valuations undertaken by in-house property experts.

The impairment recognised in the Retail and Pub Partners estates are primarily the result of the reduced trading performance of a relatively 
small number of pubs due to a combination of site specific trading circumstances and the general weakening of the UK consumer environment 
seen in the year. 

Sensitivity to changes in assumptions
The level of impairment is predominantly dependent upon judgments used in arriving at fair values, future growth rates and the discount 
rate applied to cash flow projections. The impact on the impairment charge of applying different assumptions to fair values, the growth 
rates used to calculate cash flow projections and in the pre-tax discount rates would be as follows:

Increased impairment resulting from a 10% reduction in fair value:

Retail

Pub Partners

Increased impairment resulting from a 1% increase in discount rate:

Retail

Pub Partners

2013
£m

 0.6 

 3.8 

4.4 

2013
£m

 0.4 

 3.2 

3.6 

2012
£m

 0.4 

 3.6 

4.0 

2012
£m

 0.8 

 3.3 

4.1 

84

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

14 Property, plant and equipment continued
Sensitivity to changes in assumptions continued
Increased impairment resulting from a 1% reduction in growth rate: 

Retail

Pub Partners

15 Financial assets

Trade loans (net of provision)

Total current

Trade loans (net of provision)

Investments

Total non-current

2013
£m

 0.4 

 3.2 

3.6 

2013
£m

8.1 

8.1 

25.5 

0.5 

26.0 

2012
£m

 0.8 

 3.3 

4.1 

2012
£m

6.2 

 6.2 

30.4 

2.4 

32.8 

Trade loans are net of provisions of £4.1m (2012: £4.1m). During the year £0.3m (2012: £0.1m) of the provision was utilised and £0.3m 
(2012: £0.1m) of new provision created. All trade loans, net of any provision recognised, are considered to be neither past due nor impaired.

Trade loans are advanced to customers on terms linked to supply terms such that returns are greater than interest income. The fixed rate trade 
loans amounted to £21.4m (2012: £23.9m) and variable rate trade loans amounted to £16.3m (2012: £16.8m). Included in fixed rate loans are 
£9.4m of loans with settlement related to purchase levels (2012: £6.4m). The write down of these loans has been taken on a straight-line basis 
over the remaining term of the loan as an approximation of the settlement. 

The fixed rate trade loans had a weighted average interest rate of 1.93% (2012: 2.70%) and a weighted average period of 6.81 years 
(2012: 6.73 years). Interest rates on variable rate trade loans are linked to base rate.

Trade loans

Balance at beginning of period

Advances

Repayments

Provisions

Balance at end of period

16 Subsidiary undertakings
The main subsidiary undertakings are:

Subsidiary undertakings

2013
£m

36.6 

4.1 

(7.1)

— 

33.6 

2012
£m

38.8 

4.4 

(6.6)

— 

36.6 

 Principal 
 activity 

Held by

 Holding 

Proportion
of voting
rights

Greene King Brewing and Retailing Limited

 Brewing and retailing 

Subsidiary

Ordinary shares

Greene King Retailing Parent Limited

Greene King Pubs Limited

Greene King Investments Limited

Greene King Retailing Limited

Greene King Services Limited

Greene King Retail Services Limited

Greene King Properties Limited

Hardys & Hansons Limited

Belhaven Brewery Company Limited

Belhaven Pubs Limited

Cloverleaf Restaurants Limited

Premium Dining Restaurants and Pubs Limited 

 Holding company 

 Holding company 

 Holding company 

 Pub retailing 

 Employment 

 Employment 

 Property 

 Employment 

 Employment 

 Employment 

 Employment 

 Retailing 

Parent

Parent

Parent

Subsidiary

Subsidiary

Subsidiary

Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares

Parent

Ordinary shares

Subsidiary

Subsidiary

Subsidiary

Subsidiary

Subsidiary

Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares

Ordinary shares

The Capital Pub Company Limited 

Belhaven Group Properties Limited

 Holding company 

Parent

Ordinary shares

 Property 

Subsidiary

Ordinary shares

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

100%

85

 
FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

17 Business combinations
At the start of the year the group had a 40% interest in Ensco 600 Limited, a company operating a single pub. During the year the group 
acquired the remaining 60% of the business for consideration of £0.9m and also repaid the company’s bank borrowings totalling £1.2m. 
The fair value of the tangible fixed assets acquired was £3.0m. 

On 19 July 2011 an agreement was reached on the terms of a recommended offer for the entire issued share capital of Capital Pub Company. 
The offer was declared unconditional on 22 August 2011 with the group assuming control of Capital Pub Company from 3 September 2011. 
On 5 September 2011 the group announced its intention to compulsorily acquire all outstanding shares in Capital Pub Company, 
with all purchases completed by 24 October 2011.

Fair value of assets acquired

Property, plant and equipment

Investments

Inventories

Trade receivables

Other receivables/prepayments

Cash and cash equivalents

Trade payables

Other payables/accruals

Deferred tax 

Derivatives

Debt acquired

Fair value of net assets acquired

Goodwill

Consideration

The net cash flow impact of the acquisition is:

Cash consideration

Cash acquired

Repayment of acquired debt

 Capital Pub Company 
£m

83.1 

0.7 

0.4 

0.1 

3.3 

1.4 

(2.2)

(3.7)

(3.0)

(4.1)

(27.3)

48.7 

23.5 

72.2 

Capital Pub Company 
£m

72.2 

(1.4)

70.8 

27.3 

98.1 

The consideration together with the net debt acquired of £25.9m and subsequent receipt of share option proceeds of £2.1m totals £96.0m 
and includes £2.7m relating to an additional pub acquired after the announcement of the offer on 19 July 2011. 

Goodwill has arisen primarily due to expected operating synergies and the difference between property portfolio value and value-in-use. 

The fair value of properties acquired was established following a review of properties that was carried out by qualified surveyors employed 
by the group. Properties have been revalued at their existing use value. The values of other current assets and liabilities have been adjusted 
to amounts to be realised or paid respectively.

18 Inventories

Raw materials and work in progress

Finished goods and goods for resale

Consumable stores

2013
£m

4.2 

21.3 

1.5 

27.0 

2012
£m

4.2 

22.9 

2.3 

29.4 

86

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

19 Trade and other receivables

Other receivables

Total non-current

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Total current 

Trade and other receivables are non-interest bearing. 

The ageing analysis of trade receivables is as follows:

Neither past due nor impaired

Past due but not impaired

– Less than 30 days

– 30–60 days

– Greater than 60 days

Trade receivables are shown net of a provision of £5.2m (2012: £4.9m).

20 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash at bank and in hand

Short-term deposits

Cash and cash equivalents for balance sheet

Bank overdrafts

Cash and cash equivalents for cash flow

2013
£m

 0.1 

 0.1 

66.1 

7.8 

73.9 

2013
£m

59.7 

3.3 

0.8 

2.3 

66.1 

2013
£m

 31.0 

 — 

 31.0 

 (10.8)

 20.2 

2012
£m

 0.1 

 0.1 

57.8 

10.8 

68.6 

2012
£m

52.9 

3.1 

0.5 

1.3 

57.8 

2012
£m

 33.5 

 3.3 

 36.8 

 (5.0)

 31.8 

Included in the balances above is £12.2m (2012: £16.0m) held within securitised bank accounts which are only available for use by the 
securitisation entities within the group. The securitisation entities comprise Greene King Retailing Parent Limited and its subsidiaries.

Interest receivable on cash and short-term deposits is linked to base rate and is received either monthly or in line with the term of the deposit.

21 Property, plant and equipment held for sale

Property, plant and equipment held for sale

2013
£m

8.4 

2012
£m

6.2 

At the current period end, property, plant and equipment held for sale represents £8.4m (2012: £6.2m) of pubs that are being actively marketed 
for sale with expected completion dates within one year. The value of property, plant and equipment held for sale represents the expected 
net disposal proceeds and is the value after a current year impairment charge of £0.7m (2012: £1.3m) included as an exceptional item.

22 Trade and other payables: current

Trade payables

Other payables

– Other taxation and social security costs

– Accruals and deferred income

– Interest payable

2013
£m

96.1 

58.7 

82.2 

12.9 

2012
£m

93.5 

47.0 

76.9 

12.8 

249.9 

230.2 

Trade payables and other payables are non-interest bearing. Interest payable is mainly settled monthly, quarterly or semi-annually 
throughout the year, in accordance with the terms of the related financial instrument. 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

87

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

23 Borrowings

Bank overdrafts

Bank loans – floating rate

Securitised debt

Repayment
date

Current
£m

On demand

2016

 10.8 

 — 

2013

Non-
current
£m

 — 

 177.9 

Total
£m

 10.8 

 177.9 

Current
£m

 5.0 

 — 

2012

Non-
current
£m

 — 

Total
£m

 5.0 

 206.6 

 206.6 

2005 to 2036

 29.0 

 1,263.7 

 1,292.7 

 25.7 

 1,292.7 

 1,318.4 

 39.8 

 1,441.6 

 1,481.4 

 30.7 

 1,499.3 

 1,530.0 

Bank overdrafts 
Overdrafts are utilised for the day-to-day management of cash. The group has facilities of £25.0m (2012: £25.0m) available with interest 
linked to base rate. 

Bank loans – unsecured 
On 1 April 2011 the group agreed a five-year revolving credit facility, of £400m, of which £177.9m (2012: £206.6m) was drawn down 
at the year end. Any amounts drawn down bear interest at a margin above LIBOR, with commitment payments on the undrawn portions. 
Interest is payable at each renewal date which vary in maturity. Although any individual draw-downs are repayable within 12 months of 
the balance sheet date, the group expects to renew this funding. Immediate renewal is available under the £400m facility until April 2016. 
Final repayment of the total drawn-down balance is due as one payment on the agreement repayment date.

Securitised debt 
The group has issued various tranches of bonds in connection with the securitisation of 2,035 of the group’s pubs held in Greene King 
Retailing Limited at the date of the most recent tap. The bonds are secured over the properties and their future income streams and were 
issued by Greene King Finance plc.

The group’s securitised debt consists of the following tranches:

Tranche

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

B1

B2

AB1ˆ

Nominal
value
(£m)

Carrying value (£m)***

2013

2012

 141.3 

 250.4 

 106.1 

 258.9 

 263.7 

 120.9 

 99.9 

 60.0 

140.0 

247.6 

105.1 

257.3 

263.7 

119.8 

99.2 

60.0 

148.5 

250.5 

114.9 

257.3 

268.6 

119.7 

99.2 

59.7 

1,301.2 

1,292.7 

1,318.4 

Interest

Floating

Fixed

Floating

Fixed

Floating

Fixed/floating

Floating

Floating

Effective
interest
rate** (%)

Principal
repayment
period

6.11%

5.32%

6.09%

5.11%

7.76%

6.54%

6.92%

10.51%

6.54%

2031

2031

2021

2034

2033

2034

2036

2036

Average life*

7.8 years

12.5 years

4.6 years

15.4 years

12.6 years

20.2 years

22.3 years

22.0 years

13.9 years

* 

This assumes notes are held until final maturity.

** 

Includes the effect of interest rate swaps and future rate step-ups.

***  Carrying value is net of related deferred finance fees.

ˆ 

Since the year end the group has repurchased the AB1 floating rate band at par. See notes 24 and 32.

Repayment of nominal is made by quarterly instalments, in accordance with the repayment schedule, over the period shown above. 

Payment of interest is made on quarterly dates for all classes of bond. All of the floating rate bonds are fully hedged using interest rate swaps.

The Class A1, A2, A3, A4 and A5 bonds rank pari passu in point of security and as to payment of interest and principal, and have preferential 
interest payment and repayment rights over the Class AB1 and Class B bonds. The Class B1 and B2 bonds rank pari passu in point of security, 
principal repayment and interest payment.

The Class AB1 bonds rank pari passu in point of security and as to payment of interest and principal, and have preferential interest 
payment and repayment rights over the Class B bonds. 

The securitisation is governed by various covenants, warranties and events of default, many of which apply to Greene King Retailing Limited, 
a group company. These include covenants regarding the maintenance and disposal of securitised properties and restrictions on its ability 
to move cash to other group companies.

88

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

24 Financial instruments
The primary treasury objectives of the group are to identify and manage the financial risks that arise in relation to underlying business 
needs, and provide secure and competitively priced funding for the activities of the group. If appropriate, the group uses financial 
instruments and derivatives to manage these risks.

The principal financial instruments held for the purpose of raising finance for operations are bank loans and overdraft, securitised bonds, 
cash and short-term deposits. Other financial instruments arise directly from the operations of the group, such as trade receivables, 
payables, and trade loans.

Derivative financial instruments, principally interest rate swaps, are used to manage the interest rate risks related to the group’s operations 
and financing sources. No speculative trading in derivative financial instruments is undertaken.

The main risks from the group’s financial instruments are cash flow risk, interest rate risk, credit risk and liquidity risk. The policy for managing 
each of these risks is set out below.

Interest rate risk
Exposure to changes in interest rates on the group’s borrowings is reviewed with regard to the maturity profile and cash flows of the 
underlying debt. The group uses a mixture of fixed and floating interest rate debt with exposure to market interest rate fluctuations primarily 
arising from the floating rate instruments. The group operates a policy that no less than 95% of the overall interest exposure should be hedged. 
The group enters into interest rate swaps to manage the exposure. The swaps are designated as cash flow hedges at the date of contract 
included within the accounts, and tested for effectiveness every six months.

In accordance with IFRS 7, the group has undertaken sensitivity analysis on its financial instruments which are affected by changes in 
interest rates. This analysis has been prepared on the basis of a constant amount of net debt, a constant ratio of fixed to floating interest 
rates, and on the basis of the hedging instruments in place at 28 April 2013 and 29 April 2012. The analysis relates only to balances at these 
dates and is not representative of the year as a whole. The following assumptions were made:

 • balance sheet sensitivity to interest rates applies only to derivative financial instruments, as the carrying value of debt and deposits 

does not change as interest rates move;

 • gains and losses are recognised within equity or the income statement in line with the accounting policies of the group; and
 • cash flow hedges were assumed to be effective or ineffective on the same basis as those as at the year end. An explanation for the split 
between those hedges that were effective at the year end and those that were ineffective is detailed within the cash flow hedging note.

Based on the group’s net position at the year end, a 1% increase or decrease in interest rates would change the group’s profit before tax 
by approximately £0.2m (2012: £0.1m) and the group’s equity by £106.1m (2012: £101.9m).

Liquidity risk
The group mitigates liquidity risk by managing cash generated by its operations combined with bank borrowings and long-term debt. 
The group’s objective is to maintain a balance between the continuity of funding and flexibility through the use of overdrafts and bank 
loans. The group also monitors the maturity of financial liabilities to avoid the risk of a shortage of funds.

The standard payment terms that the company has with its suppliers is 60 days following month end (2012: 60 days following month end).

Excess cash used in managing liquidity is placed on interest-bearing deposit with maturities fixed at no more than 1 month. Short-term 
flexibility is achieved through the use of short-term borrowing on the money markets.

The table below summarises the maturity profile of the group’s financial liabilities at 28 April 2013 and 29 April 2012 based on contractual 
undiscounted payments including interest.

Period ended 28 April 2013

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings:

– Capital

– Interest

Derivative financial instruments

Trade payables and accruals

Provisions in respect of financial liabilities

Within
1 year
£m

 41.3 

 80.9 

122.2 

 12.8 

 178.3 

 0.5 

313.8 

1–2 years
£m

2–5 years
£m

 > 5 years 
£m

Total 
£m

 32.2 

 79.2 

 111.4 

 13.2 

—

 0.5 

 282.2 

 1,136.4 

 1,492.1 

 213.5 

 709.0 

 1,082.6 

 495.7 

 1,845.4 

 2,574.7 

 32.5 

 180.7 

 —

 1.6 

 —

 8.3 

 239.2 

 178.3 

 10.9 

 125.1 

 529.8 

 2,034.4 

 3,003.1 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

89

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

24 Financial instruments continued
Liquidity risk continued

Period ended 29 April 2012

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings:

– Capital

– Interest

Derivative financial instruments

Trade payables and accruals

Provisions in respect of financial liabilities

Within
1 year
£m

 32.8 

 84.6 

 117.4 

 9.7 

 170.4 

 1.2 

1–2 years
£m

2–5 years
£m

 > 5 years 
£m

 Total 
£m

 29.4 

 83.0 

 308.8 

 228.2 

 1,172.8 

 1,543.8 

 776.2 

 1,172.0 

 112.4 

 537.0 

 1,949.0 

 2,715.8 

 9.6 

 —

 0.6 

 27.1 

 —

 1.9 

 154.4 

 —

 10.1 

 200.8 

 170.4 

 13.8 

 298.7 

 122.6 

 566.0 

 2,113.5 

 3,100.8 

Credit risk
The policy for third party trading is that all customers who wish to trade on credit terms are subject to regular credit verification procedures. 
Receivable balances are also monitored on an on-going basis and provided against where deemed necessary to limit the exposure to bad 
debts to a non-significant level.

Other financial assets includes trade loans and cash. Credit risk is the risk of default by the counterparty to discharge their obligation 
and the maximum exposure of the group is the carrying amount of these instruments.

There is no requirement for collateral and there are no significant concentrations of credit risk within the group.

Cash flow hedging
At 28 April 2013 the group held 4 (2012: 4) interest rate swap contracts for a nominal value of £140m (2012: £140m), designated as a hedge 
of the cash flow interest rate risk of the £177.9m (2012: £206.6m) draw-down from the variable credit facility in the year. The interest rate 
swaps are held on the balance sheet as a fair value liability of £4.0m (2012: £2.4m). The cash flows occurred semi-annually based on 
a variable rate of interest based on LIBOR.

At 28 April 2013 the group held 5 (2012: 5) interest rate swap contracts for a nominal value of £667.9m (2012: £695.7m), entered into as part 
of the securitisation and subsequent securitisation taps. A fair value liability of £235.2m (2012: £198.4m) has been recognised on the balance 
sheet in respect of these contracts which are designated cash flow hedges against £667.9m (2012: £695.7m) of variable rate bonds, receiving 
a variable rate of interest based on LIBOR and paying a weighted average fixed rate of 5.1% (2012: 5.1%). The contract maturity dates are 
December 2034 and March 2036. The bonds and interest rate swaps have the same critical terms. 

Changes in cash flow hedge fair values are recognised in the hedging reserve to the extent that the hedges are effective. In anticipation 
of the repurchase of the £60.0m AB1 bond post-year end the cash flow hedge in respect of this bond has ceased to be effective and hedge 
accounting has been discontinued. Accordingly an exceptional cost of £28.2m has been recognised in respect of the fair value of the interest 
rate swap no longer qualifying for hedge accounting which has been recycled from equity to the income statement. The remaining interest 
rate swaps have been assessed as highly effective during the period and are expected to remain highly effective over their remaining 
contract lives.

The percentage of debt that was fixed as at the year end was 98.6% (2012: 97.4%) in line with the group’s policy of fixing at least 95% of all debt.

Interest rate risk
The following tables set out the group’s exposure to interest rate risk and the maturity profile for each class of interest-bearing financial 
asset and financial liability:

28 April 2013

Fixed rate

Securitised debt

Financial asset

Variable rate

Securitised debt

Bank loans

Overdraft

Financial asset

Cash and short-term deposits

Interest rate swap liabilities

Within
1 year
£m

3.3 

(5.6)

25.7 

— 

10.8 

(2.5)

(31.0)

12.8 

1–2 years
£m

2–3 years
£m

3–4 years
£m

4–5 years
£m

 > 5 years 
£m

 Total 
£m

3.8 

(3.8)

26.8 

— 

—

(2.3)

— 

13.2 

4.4 

(3.2)

28.0 

177.8 

—

(2.3)

— 

12.0 

5.1 

(2.7)

6.1 

(2.0)

602.0 

(4.1)

624.7 

(21.4)

29.2 

30.5 

527.8 

668.0 

— 

—

(2.1)

— 

10.9 

—

—

(2.0)

— 

9.6 

— 

—

(5.1)

— 

180.7 

177.8

10.8

(16.3)

(31.0)

239.2 

90

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

24 Financial instruments continued
Interest rate risk continued

29 April 2012

Fixed rate

Securitised debt

Financial asset

Variable rate

Securitised debt

Bank loans

Overdraft

Financial asset

Cash and short-term deposits

Interest rate swap liabilities

Within
1 year
£m

2.8 

(4.2)

 22.9 

—

5.0 

(2.0)

(36.8)

9.7 

1–2 years
£m

2–3 years
£m

3–4 years
£m

4–5 years
£m

 > 5 years 
£m

 Total 
£m

3.3 

(2.9)

3.8 

(2.5)

4.4 

(2.2)

5.1 

(2.0)

608.1 

(10.8)

25.7 

26.8 

—

—

(2.0)

—

9.6 

—

—

(1.9)

—

9.5 

28.0 

206.6 

—

(1.7)

—

8.8 

29.2 

558.3 

—

—

(1.7)

—

8.8 

—

—

(7.3)

—

154.4 

200.8 

627.5 

(24.6)

690.9 

206.6 

5.0 

(16.6)

(36.8)

The interest on variable rate financial instruments is repriced at intervals of less than one year. The interest on fixed rate financial instruments 
is fixed until the maturity of the instrument. Investments, trade and other receivables, and trade and other payables are not included above 
as they are non-interest bearing and are not subject to interest rate risk.

Fair values
Set out in the table below is a comparison of carrying amounts and fair values of all of the group’s financial instruments.

The fair values of the financial assets and liabilities are included at the amount at which the instrument could be exchanged in a current 
transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced liquidation or sale. The following methods and assumptions were used to estimate 
the fair values:

Cash and cash equivalents (comprising cash at bank and in hand and short-term deposits) – approximates to the carrying amount stated 
in the accounts.

Financial assets – these are carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method and fair value is deemed to be the same as this.

Short-term loans and overdrafts – approximates to the carrying amount because of the short maturity of these instruments.

Long-term loans – based on quoted market prices in the case of the securitised debt; approximates to the carrying amount in the case 
of the floating rate bank loans and other variable rate borrowings.

Interest rate swaps – fair values and effective interest rates of derivatives and other borrowings have been based on quotations from 
counterparties and represent estimates of the amount the group would expect to pay or receive on termination of the agreements.

Financial liabilities

Overdraft

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings

– securitised debt

– floating rate bank loans

– other variable rate borrowings

Interest rate swaps

Financial assets

Cash

Financial assets

Fair 
value
2013
£m

Carrying
value
2013
£m

Fair 
value
2012
£m

Carrying
value
2012
 £m 

 10.8 

 10.8 

 5.0 

 5.0 

 1,259.9 

 1,292.7 

 1,116.5 

 1,318.4 

 177.8 

 177.8 

 206.6 

 206.6 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 — 

 239.2 

 239.2 

 200.8 

 200.8 

 (31.0)

 (33.6)

 (31.0)

 (33.6)

 (36.8)

 (39.0)

 (36.8)

 (39.0)

Carrying values are stated net of any deferred finance fees which amounted to £10.7m (2012: £14.0m).

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

91

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

24 Financial instruments continued
Hierarchical classification of financial assets and liabilities measured at fair value
IFRS 7 requires that the classification of financial instruments at fair value be determined by reference to the source of inputs used 
to derive fair value. 

The classification uses the following three-level hierarchy:

Level 1 – unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

Level 2 –  other techniques for which all inputs which have a significant effect on the recorded fair value are observable, either directly 

or indirectly.

Level 3 – techniques which use inputs which have a significant effect on the recorded fair value that are not based on observable market data.

Fair value measurement at the end of the reporting period using:

At 28 April 2013

Financial liabilities
Interest rate swaps

At 29 April 2012

Financial liabilities
Interest rate swaps

Total
£m

Level 1
£m

Level 2
£m

Level 3
£m

239.2

 — 

239.2

 — 

Total
£m

Level 1
£m

Level 2
£m

Level 3
£m

200.8

 — 

200.8

 — 

During the periods ending 28 April 2013 and 29 April 2012 there were no transfers between levels 1, 2, or 3 fair value measurements.

Capital risk management 
The group aims to maximise shareholder value by maintaining a strong credit rating and a core level of debt which optimises the weighted 
average cost of capital (WACC) and shareholder value. 

A number of mechanisms are used to manage debt and equity levels (together referred to as capital), as appropriate in the light of economic 
and trading conditions. To maintain or adjust the capital structure, the group may adjust the dividend payment to shareholders, return 
capital to shareholders or issue new shares. No changes were made in the objectives, policies or processes during the period.

The group monitors capital using interest cover and several other measures including fixed charge cover, the ratio of net debt to EBITDA 
and free cash flow debt service coverage. Interest cover is calculated by dividing operating profit before exceptional items by net finance 
costs before exceptional items (note 7). For the period to 28 April 2013 interest cover was 2.9x (2012: 2.7x). The board’s dividend policy 
is to maintain a minimum dividend cover of two times adjusted basic earnings per share.

25 Provisions

At 1 May 2011

Reclassification from trade and other payables

Unwinding of discount element of provisions

Provided for during the period

Utilised during the period

At 29 April 2012

Unwinding of discount element of provisions

Utilised during the period

At 28 April 2013

Provisions have been analysed between current and non-current as follows:

Current

Non-current

Property 
leases
£m

7.1 

1.2 

0.4 

1.8 

(1.5)

9.0 

0.5 

(1.8)

7.7 

28 April
2013 
£m

29 April
2012 
£m

0.5 

7.2 

7.7 

1.2 

7.8 

9.0 

The provision for property leases has been set up to cover operating costs of vacant or loss-making premises. The provision covers the expected 
shortfall between operating income and rents payable. Payments are expected to be on-going on these properties for an average of 15 years.

92

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

26 Share capital

Called up, allotted and fully paid

At beginning of period

Issue of share capital – share options exercised

At end of period

2013

2012

Number of
issued
shares
m

Share
capital
£m

Number of
issued
shares
m

217.5 

0.8 

218.3 

27.2 

0.1 

27.3 

217.0 

0.5 

217.5 

Share
capital
£m

27.1 

0.1 

27.2 

Details of options granted and outstanding are included in note 8.

27 Reserves
Share premium account
Share premium represents the excess of proceeds received over the nominal value of new shares issued.

Capital redemption reserve
Capital redemption reserve arose from the purchase and cancellation of own share capital, and represents the nominal amount of the share 
capital cancelled.

Hedging reserve
Hedging reserve adjustments arise from the movement in fair value of the group’s derivative instruments used as an effective hedge, in line 
with the accounting policy disclosed in note 1. Amounts recycled to income are included within finance costs in the income statement.

Own shares 
Own shares relates to shares held in treasury, held by the employee benefit trust or purchased to fulfil awards made under the deferred share 
bonus scheme. At 28 April 2013 0.69m shares (2012: 0.97m) were held in treasury, 1.06m shares (2012: 1.09m) were held by the employee 
benefit trust and 0.05m (2012: 0.12m) were held to fulfil awards under the deferred share bonus scheme. The market value at 28 April 2013 
of the treasury shares was £4.9m (2012: £5.0m), of the shares held by the employee benefit trust was £7.5m (2012: £5.6m) and of the shares 
held for the deferred share bonus scheme was £0.3m (2012: £0.6m). 

The employee benefit trust is independently managed and has purchased shares in order to satisfy outstanding employee share options 
and potential awards under the long-term incentive plan.

At the year end 0.55m (2012: 0.84m) treasury shares and 0.44m (2012: 0.23m) shares in the employee benefit trust were allocated to meet 
awards under the long-term incentive plan.

A transfer of £4.0m (2012: £nil) from own shares to retained earnings has been made to reflect transfers to satisfy awards under the long 
term incentive plan and options exercised under the executive share option plan and reflects the weighted average cost of own shares.

During the period 0.05m (2012: 0.12m) shares were repurchased at a cost of £0.3m (2012: £0.6m) to fulfil awards made under the deferred 
share bonus scheme with 0.11m shares transferred to individuals to satisfy awards. The employee benefit trust purchased 0.45m shares 
(2012: nil) at a cost of £3.2m and 0.79m (2012: nil) shares were transferred to satisfy awards under the long-term incentive plan.

Goodwill 
The cumulative amount of goodwill written off to retained earnings in respect of acquisitions made prior to May 1998 amounts to £89.7m.

28 Working capital and non-cash movements

Decrease/(increase) in inventories
(Increase)/decrease in trade and other receivables
Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables
Reclassification of provisions
(Decrease)/increase in provisions
Share-based payment expense
Difference between defined benefit pension contributions paid and amounts charged
Exceptional items

Working capital and non-cash movements

2013
£m

2.4 
(6.4)
17.3 
—
(1.7)
3.9 
(8.4)
(1.1)

6.0 

2012
£m

(4.3)
6.4 
(3.8)
1.2 
0.3 
3.9 
(9.0)
(4.7)

(10.0)

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

93

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

29 Analysis of and movements in net debt

Cash in hand, at bank
Short-term deposits*
Overdrafts
Current portion of borrowings
Non-current portion of borrowings

Closing net debt

* Included in cash on the balance sheet.

Movement in net debt

Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents
Proceeds – advances of loans
Repayment of principal – securitised debt
Repayment of principal – loans and loan notes

Decrease/(increase) in net debt arising from cash flows
Other non-cash movements

Decrease/(increase) in net debt
Opening net debt

Closing net debt

2013
£m

2012
£m

31.0 
— 
(10.8)
(29.0)
(1,441.6)

33.5 
3.3 
(5.0)
(25.7)
(1,499.3)

(1,450.4)

(1,493.2)

2013
£m

 (11.6)
 — 
 27.8 
 30.0 

 46.2 
 (3.4)

2012
£m

 (14.6)
 (96.6)
 26.3 
 3.9 

 (81.0)
 (2.0)

 42.8 
 (1,493.2)

 (83.0)
 (1,410.2)

 (1,450.4)

 (1,493.2)

30 Financial commitments
The group has entered into commercial leases on certain properties and items of plant and machinery. The terms of the leases vary but typically 
on inception a property lease will be for a period of up to 30 years and plant and machinery will be for less than 5 years. Most property 
leases have an upwards only rent review based on open market rents at the time of the review.

Future minimum rentals payable under non-cancellable operating leases:

Within one year
Between one and five years
After five years

2013
 £m 

13.9 
47.4 
138.5 

199.8 

2012
 £m 

13.5 
46.1 
148.5 

208.1 

The group leases its licensed estate and other non-licensed properties to tenants. The majority of lease agreements have terms of between 
6 months and 25 years and are classified for accounting purposes as operating leases. Most of the leases with terms of over 3 years include 
provision for rent reviews on either a three-year or five-year basis.

Future minimum lease rentals receivable under non-cancellable operating leases are as follows:

Within one year
Between one and five years
After five years

2013
 £m 

34.7 
76.4 
71.8 

2012
 £m 

39.3 
73.7 
72.3 

182.9 

185.3 

94

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

31 Related party transactions
No transactions have been entered into with related parties during the period.

Greene King Finance plc is a special purpose entity set up to raise bond finance for the group, and as such is deemed a related party. 
The results of the entity have been consolidated.

Compensation of directors and other key management personnel of the group

Short-term employee benefits (including national insurance contributions)
Post-employment pension and medical benefits
Share-based payments

2013
 £m 

3.8
0.5
1.3

5.6 

2012
 £m 

4.1 
0.5 
1.2 

5.8 

Directors’ interests in an employee share incentive plan
Details of the options held by executive members of the board of directors are included in the remuneration report. No options have been 
granted to the non-executive members of the board of directors under this scheme.

32 Post-balance sheet events
Final dividend
A final dividend of 19.45p per share (2012: 18.1p) amounting to a dividend of £42.4m (2012: £39.0m) was proposed by the directors 
at their meeting on 26 June 2013. These financial statements do not reflect the dividend payable.

Financing
Since the year end, the group has re-purchased the £60m AB1 floating rate bond at par. This has been financed from bank loan facilities, 
which have been increased to £460m and extended to June 2018.

The interest rate swap which was designated as a hedge against the AB1 bond will be retained though the existing hedge arrangement 
has ceased to be effective and as a result the group has recognised an exceptional cost of £28.2m (note 24).

33 Contingent liabilities
The group has provided guarantees totalling £1.9m at 28 April 2013 (2012: £4.0m) in respect of free trade customers’ bank borrowings.

In a previous period the group received a refund of £7.0m from HMRC in respect of VAT on gaming machines following a ruling that the 
application of VAT to certain gaming machines contravened the European Union’s principle of fiscal neutrality. HMRC have appealed 
against the ruling and last year the case was referred from the European Court of Justice back to UK courts. We are awaiting their final 
decision. If HMRC’s appeal is upheld the refund of £7.0m and associated interest of £1.0m would become repayable.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

95

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Independent auditor’s report (company)
To the members of Greene King plc

We have audited the parent company financial statements of Greene King plc for the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013 which comprise the 
parent company balance sheet and the related notes 34 to 44. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in their preparation 
is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

This report is made solely to the company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 2006. Our audit 
work has been undertaken so that we might state to the company’s members those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s 
report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than 
the company and the company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed. 

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditor
As explained more fully in the directors’ responsibilities statement set out on page 57, the directors are responsible for the preparation 
of the parent company financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and 
express an opinion on the parent company financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing 
(UK and Ireland). Those standards require us to comply with the Auditing Practices Board’s Ethical Standards for Auditors.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements
An audit involves obtaining evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements sufficient to give reasonable assurance 
that the financial statements are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or error. This includes an assessment of: 
whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the parent company’s circumstances and have been consistently applied and adequately 
disclosed; the reasonableness of significant accounting estimates made by the directors; and the overall presentation of the financial 
statements. In addition, we read all the financial and non-financial information in the annual report to identify material inconsistencies 
with the audited financial statements. If we become aware of any apparent material misstatements or inconsistencies we consider the 
implications for our report.

Opinion on financial statements
In our opinion the parent company financial statements:

 • give a true and fair view of the state of the company’s affairs as at 28 April 2013;
 • have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice; and
 • have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion:

 • the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006; and
 • the information given in the directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial statements are prepared is consistent 

with the parent company financial statements.

Matters on which we are required to report by exception
We have nothing to report in respect of the following matters where the Companies Act 2006 requires us to report to you if, in our opinion:

 • adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received 

from branches not visited by us; or

 • the parent company financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited are not in agreement 

with the accounting records and returns; or

 • certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or
 • we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit.

Other matter
We have reported separately on the group financial statements of Greene King plc for the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013.

Bob Forsyth (Senior statutory auditor)
for and on behalf of Ernst & Young LLP, Statutory Auditor
Cambridge
26 June 2013

Notes:

1.   The maintenance and integrity of the Greene King plc website is the responsibility of the directors; the work carried out by the auditors does not involve consideration 
of these matters and, accordingly, the auditors accept no responsibility for any changes that may have occurred to the financial statements since they were initially 
presented on the website.

2.  Legislation in the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions. 

96

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Company balance sheet
As at 28 April 2013
Registered number: 24511

Fixed assets
Investments

Current assets
Debtors
Deferred tax
Cash
Creditors: due within one year
Derivative financial instruments
Income tax payable
Other creditors

Net current liabilities

Total assets less current liabilities
Creditors: due after more than one year
Medium and long-term debt
Derivative financial instruments

Net assets

Capital and reserves
Called-up share capital
Share premium account
Revaluation reserve
Hedging reserve
Other reserve
Own shares
Profit and loss account

Shareholders’ funds

Signed on behalf of the board on 26 June 2013

T J W Bridge 
Director   

R Anand
Director

As at
28 April
2013
 £m 

As at
29 April
2012
 £m 

Note

38

2,553.6

2,549.0

39

41

40

41
41

42
43
43
43
43
43
43

—
—
2.4

—
—
2.8

(0.9)
(1.2)
(1,791.1)

(0.9)
(1.0)
(1,716.8)

(1,790.8)

(1,715.9)

762.8

833.1

(177.8)
(3.1)

581.9

27.3
253.8
2.5
(4.0)
93.9
(9.1)
217.5

581.9

(206.6)
(1.5)

625.0

27.2
251.3
2.5
(2.4)
93.9
(9.6)
262.1

625.0

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

97

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the company accounts
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

34 Accounting policies
Basis of accounting and presentation
The accounts are prepared on a going-concern basis, in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and applicable accounting and financial 
reporting standards in the United Kingdom (UK GAAP). They are prepared under the historical cost convention with the exception of 
derivatives, where the company uses interest rate swaps to hedge its exposure to interest rate fluctuations on its variable rate borrowings.

Changes in accounting policy
The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the previous financial year.

Investments
Investments in subsidiaries are recorded at cost less impairment and held as fixed assets on the balance sheet. The carrying value of 
investments is reviewed for impairment if events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying value may not be recoverable.

Deferred tax
Deferred tax is recognised in respect of all timing differences that have originated but not reversed at the balance sheet date where 
transactions or events have occurred at that date that will result in an obligation to pay more, or a right to pay less or to receive more tax, 
with the following exceptions: 

 • provision is made for tax on gains arising from the revaluation (and similar fair value adjustments) of fixed assets, and gains on disposal 

of fixed assets that have rolled over into replacement assets, only to the extent that, at the balance sheet date, there is a binding agreement 
to dispose of the assets concerned. However, no provision is made where, on the basis of all available evidence at the balance sheet date, 
it is more likely than not that the taxable gain will be rolled over into replacement assets and charged to tax only where the replacement 
assets are sold; and 

 • deferred tax assets are recognised only to the extent that the directors consider that it is more likely than not that there will be suitable 

taxable profits from which the future reversal of the underlying timing difference can be deducted.

Deferred tax is measured on an undiscounted basis at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which timing differences 
reverse, based on tax rates and laws enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Financial instruments
Financial instruments are recognised when the company becomes party to the contractual provisions of the instrument and are de-recognised 
when the company no longer controls the contractual rights that comprise the financial instrument, normally through sale or when all cash 
flows attributable to the instrument are passed to an independent third party.

The company is exempt, in accordance with FRS 29.2D, from producing disclosure required by the standard as the group accounts contain 
disclosure that complies with FRS 29 (IFRS 7).

Interest-bearing loans and borrowings
All loans and borrowings are initially recognised at fair value of the consideration received, net of issue costs. After initial recognition, 
interest-bearing loans and borrowings are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Derivative financial instruments and hedge accounting
The company uses interest rate swaps to hedge its exposure to interest rate fluctuations on its variable rate borrowings.

Interest rate swaps are initially measured at fair value, if any, and carried on the balance sheet as an asset or liability. Subsequent 
measurement is at fair value determined by reference to market values for similar instruments. If a derivative does not qualify for hedge 
accounting the gain or loss arising on the movement in fair value is recognised in the profit and loss account.

Hedge accounting
To qualify for hedge accounting the hedge relationship must be designated and documented at inception. Documentation must include the 
company’s risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge and formal allocation to the item or transaction being hedged. 
The company also documents how it will assess the effectiveness of the hedge and carries out assessments on a regular basis to determine 
whether it has been, and is likely to continue to be, highly effective.

Hedges can be classified as either fair value (hedging exposure to changes in fair value of an asset or liability), or cash flow (hedging the 
variability in cash flows attributable to an asset, liability, or forecast transaction). The company uses its interest rate swaps as cash flow hedges.

For these cash flow hedges, the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised directly in equity, while the 
ineffective portion is recognised in the profit and loss account. Amounts taken to equity are transferred to the profit and loss account when 
the hedged transaction affects profit or loss.

If a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, amounts previously recognised in equity are transferred to profit or loss. If the 
hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised without replacement or rollover, or if its designation as a hedge is revoked, 
amounts previously recognised in equity remain in equity until the forecast transaction occurs and are then transferred to the profit and 
loss account as above. If the related transaction is not expected to occur, the amount is taken to profit and loss.

Own shares
Own shares consist of treasury shares and shares held within an employee benefit trust. The company has an employee benefit trust 
for the granting of shares to applicable employees. 

Own shares are recognised at cost as a deduction from equity shareholders’ funds. Subsequent consideration received for the sale of such 
shares is also recognised in equity, with any difference between the sale proceeds and the original cost being taken to revenue reserves. 
No gain or loss is recognised in the performance statements on transactions in treasury shares.

98

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

34 Accounting policies continued
Share-based payments
Certain employees and directors of subsidiary companies receive equity-settled remuneration, whereby they render services in exchange 
for shares or rights over shares. The fair value of the shares and options granted is measured using a Black-Scholes model, at the date at 
which they were granted. No account is taken in the fair value calculation of any vesting conditions (service and performance), other than 
market conditions (performance linked to the price of the shares of the company). Any other conditions that are required to be met in order 
for an employee to become fully entitled to an award are considered non-vesting conditions. Like market performance, non-vesting conditions 
are taken into account in determining the grant date fair value. The fair value of shares and options granted is recognised as an increase 
in the company’s investments in its subsidiaries with a corresponding increase in equity spread over the period in which the performance 
conditions are fulfilled ending on the relevant vesting date. The cumulative amount recognised as an investment reflects the extent 
to which the vesting period has expired, adjusted for the estimated number of shares and options that are ultimately expected to vest. 

In accordance with the exemption within FRS 20 no amount is recorded in respect of grants made under the above schemes prior 
to 7 November 2002 which had not vested by the date of implementation of FRS 20.

Related party transactions
In accordance with FRS 8 Related Party Disclosures the company is not required to disclose transactions with its wholly-owned subsidiaries.

35 Profit for the period
No profit or loss account is presented for the company as permitted by s408 of the Companies Act 2006. The profit after tax for the period 
is £10.0m (2012: £9.1m profit).

36 Auditor’s remuneration
Auditor’s remuneration in respect of the company audit was £16,300 (2012: £15,760).

37 Directors’ remuneration and employee costs
Details of directors’ remuneration is contained in the directors’ remuneration report on pages 46 to 54. The company has no employees 
other than directors and the directors are not remunerated through this company. Details of share options issued by the company are given 
in note 8 to the group accounts.

The directors do not believe that it is practicable to apportion these amounts between their services as directors of the company and their 
services as directors of other group companies.

38 Investments

Cost and net book value at 29 April 2012
Share-based payment awards to employees of subsidiaries
Investment in subsidiaries

Cost and net book value at 28 April 2013

Principal subsidiaries

Greene King Brewing and Retailing Limited
Greene King Retailing Parent Limited
Greene King Pubs Limited
Greene King Investments Limited
Greene King Retailing Limited
Greene King Services Limited
Greene King Retail Services Limited
Greene King Properties Limited
Hardys & Hansons Limited
Belhaven Brewery Company Limited
Belhaven Pubs Limited
Cloverleaf Restaurants Limited
Premium Dining Restaurants and Pubs Limited
The Capital Pub Company Limited
Belhaven Group Properties Limited

The country of incorporation for all companies is the United Kingdom.

Investments
in
subsidiaries
£m

1,570.8 
3.9 
0.7 

Loans to
subsidiaries
£m

978.2 
—
—

Total
£m

2,549.0 
3.9 
0.7 

1,575.4 

978.2 

2,553.6 

Held by

 Holding 

Subsidiary
Parent
Parent
Parent
Subsidiary
Subsidiary
Subsidiary
Parent
Subsidiary
Subsidiary
Subsidiary
Subsidiary
Subsidiary
Parent
Subsidiary

100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%
100%

 Principal 
 activity 

 Brewing and retailing 
Holding company 
 Holding company 
 Holding company 
 Pub retailing 
Employment 
Employment 
Property 
Employment 
Employment 
Employment 
Employment 
Retailing 
 Holding company 
Property 

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

99

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Notes to the company accounts continued
For the 52 weeks ended 28 April 2013

39 Deferred tax

Deferred tax asset at 29 April 2012
Tax on net loss on revaluation of cash flow hedges charged through equity

Deferred tax asset at 28 April 2013

40 Other creditors

Accruals and deferred income

Amounts owed to subsidiaries

41 Borrowings

2013
£m

—
—

—

2013
£m

2.1 

2012
£m

0.1 
(0.1)

—

2012
£m

2.0 

1,789.0 

1,714.8 

1,791.1 

1,716.8 

Within
one year
£m

2013

After
one year
£m

Total
£m

Within
one year
£m

2012

After
one year
£m

Total
£m

Bank loans – floating rate

— 

177.8 

177.8 

— 

 206.6 

206.6

At 28 April 2013, the company held 4 (2012: 4) interest rate swap contracts to hedge cash flow interest rate risk related to floating rate debt. 
The swaps had nominal value of £140m (2012: £140m) and are held on the balance sheet as a net fair value liability of £4.0m (2012: £2.4m). 
The details of terms and interest rates are included as part of the group’s portfolio in note 24.

Bank loans due after one year are repayable as follows:

Due between one and two years
Due between two and five years
Due after more than five years

2013
£m

— 
177.8 
— 

177.8 

2012
£m

— 
206.6 
— 

 206.6 

Although the draw-down is repayable within twelve months of the balance sheet date, immediate renewal is available until April 2016 
(2012: April 2016) for the facility. 

42 Allotted and issued share capital

Allotted, called-up and fully paid

Ordinary shares of 12.5p each
218.3m shares (2012: 217.5m)

Further information on share capital is given in note 26 of the group accounts.

2013
£m

2012
£m

27.3 

27.2 

100

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

43 Reconciliation of shareholders’ funds

Share
capital
£m

Share
premium
£m

Revaluation
reserve
£m

Hedging
reserve
£m

Other
reserve
£m

Own
shares
£m

Profit and
loss
account
£m

At 1 May 2011
Cash flow hedges – loss taken to equity
Tax on cash flow hedges
Issue of share capital
Release of shares (note 27)
Repurchase of shares
Share-based payment credit in respect 
of subsidiaries
Profit for the period
Dividends

At 29 April 2012
Cash flow hedges – loss taken to equity
Issue of share capital
Release of shares (note 27)
Repurchase of shares
Share-based payment credit in respect 
of subsidiaries
Profit for the period
Dividends

27.1 
— 
— 
0.1 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

27.2 
— 
0.1 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

249.8 
— 
— 
1.5 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

251.3 
— 
2.5 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

2.5 
— 
— 
— 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

2.5 
— 
— 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

(0.2)
(2.1)
(0.1) 
— 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

(2.4)
(1.6)
— 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

93.9 
— 
— 
— 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

93.9 
— 
— 
— 
— 

— 
— 
— 

(9.0)
— 
— 
— 
— 
(0.6)

— 
— 
— 

(9.6)
— 
— 
4.0 
(3.5)

— 
— 
— 

At 28 April 2013

27.3 

253.8 

2.5 

(4.0)

93.9 

(9.1)

299.7 
— 
— 
— 
— 
— 

3.9 
9.1 
(50.6)

262.1 
— 
— 
(4.0)
— 

3.9 
10.0 
(54.5)

217.5 

Total
£m

663.8 
(2.1)
(0.1) 
1.6 
— 
(0.6)

3.9 
9.1 
(50.6)

625.0 
(1.6)
2.6 
— 
(3.5)

3.9 
10.0 
(54.5)

581.9 

Share premium account
Share premium represents the excess of proceeds received over the nominal value of new shares issued.

Other reserve
The Other reserve consists of £3.3m (2012: £3.3m) capital redemption reserve arising from the purchase of own share capital and £90.6m 
(2012: £90.6m) arising from transfer of revalued assets to other group companies and will only be realised when the related assets are 
disposed of by the group.

Hedging reserve
Hedging reserve adjustments arise from the movement in fair value of the company’s derivative instruments used as an effective hedge, 
in line with the accounting policy disclosed in note 34.

Own shares
Own shares relates to shares held in treasury and by the employee benefit trust. Movement in own shares is described in note 27 
to the group accounts.

44 Contingent liabilities
In a previous period the company received a refund of £6.1m from HMRC in respect of VAT on gaming machines following a ruling that 
the application of VAT to certain gaming machines contravened the European Union’s principle of fiscal neutrality. HMRC have appealed 
against the ruling and last year the case was referred from the European Court of Justice back to UK courts. We are awaiting their final 
decision. If HMRC’s appeal is upheld the refund of £6.1m and associated interest of £0.9m would become repayable.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

101

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Group financial record

Income statement

Revenue
Operating profit before exceptionals
Profit before taxation and exceptionals
Profit before taxation

Basic earnings per share(1)
Adjusted basic earnings per share(1)
Adjusted dividend per share(1)

Adjusted operating profit/revenue
Adjusted tax expense/profit before tax
Adjusted interest cover (times)
Adjusted dividend cover (times)

(1)  All relevant years adjusted for the bonus element of the 2009 rights issue. 

Balance sheet

Property, plant and equipment
Goodwill
Financial assets
Property, plant and equipment held for sale
Working capital
Derivatives
Provisions
Net debt

Net assets 

Gearing 

Cash flow and investment

EBITDA before exceptionals

Cash inflow from operations
Interest, tax and dividends
Capital expenditure
Proceeds from sales of property, plant and equipment
Trade loans and investments
Acquisitions
Other

Decrease/(increase) in debt

2013
 £m 

 1,194.7 
 248.2 
 162.0 
 114.8 

45.5p
57.0p
26.6p

20.8%
24.0%
 2.9 
2.1

2012
 £m 

 1,140.4 
 236.2 
 152.0 
 125.1 

47.6p
53.0p
24.8p

20.7%
25.0%
 2.7 
 2.1 

2011
 £m 

 1,042.7 
 222.0 
 140.0 
 116.8 

49.7p
48.2p
23.1p

21.3%
26.0%
 2.7 
 2.1 

2010
 £m 

 984.1 
 211.3 
 123.0 
 101.9 

37.8p
43.4p
21.5p

21.5%
25.5%
 2.4 
 2.0 

2009
 £m 

 954.6 
 216.2 
 118.5 
 54.3 

29.5p
53.4p
21.0p

22.6%
25.0%
 2.2 
 2.5 

 £m 

 £m 

 £m 

 £m 

 £m 

 2,211.1 
 724.8 
 34.1 
 8.4 
 (174.2)
 (239.2)
 (143.1)
 (1,450.4)

 971.5 

149%

 2,191.3 
 729.3 
 39.0 
 6.2 
 (168.6)
 (200.8)
 (157.9)
 (1,493.2)

 2,094.9 
 705.8 
 40.4 
 3.7 
 (164.5)
 (116.3)
 (172.9)
 (1,410.2)

 2,012.7 
 679.7 
 41.8 
 — 
 (152.5)
 (108.8)
 (211.9)
 (1,348.1)

 1,997.3 
 673.8 
 40.3 
 — 
 (143.5)
 (144.5)
 (221.4)
 (1,558.6)

 945.3 

 980.9 

 912.9 

 643.4 

158%

144%

148%

242%

 £m 

 £m 

 £m 

 £m 

 £m 

 306.5 

312.5
 (170.7)
 (123.6)
 28.0 
 3.0 
 (0.9)
 (5.5)

 42.8 

 292.0 

 276.6 

 264.4 

 267.3 

282.0
 (167.1)
 (126.8)
 29.9 
 2.2 
 (70.8)
 (32.4)

279.2
 (163.5)
 (96.2)
 27.8 
 1.5 
 (60.5)
 (50.4)

276.3
 (157.6)
 (76.0)
 27.2 
 (1.2)
 (61.6)
 203.4 

260.9
 (154.3)
 (95.5)
 44.2 
 (6.0)
— 
 (2.4)

 (83.0)

 (62.1)

 210.5 

 46.9 

Adjusted earnings per share, operating profit, taxation, interest cover and dividend cover exclude the effect of exceptional items.

102

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Shareholder information

Financial calendar
Ex-dividend date 
Record date for final dividend 
Annual general meeting 
Payment of final dividend 
Announcement of interim results 
Payment of interim dividend 
Preliminary announcement of the 2013/14 results 

7 August 2013
 9 August 2013
3 September 2013
9 September 2013
 3 December 2013
24 January 2014
July 2014

Company secretary and registered office
Lindsay Keswick
Westgate Brewery 
Bury St Edmunds
Suffolk IP33 1QT
Telephone: 01284 763 222
Fax: 01284 706 502
Website: www.greeneking.co.uk 

Registrars
Capita Registrars
The Registry, 34 Beckenham Road
Beckenham, Kent BR3 4TU
Telephone: 0871 664 0300*
Fax: 01484 601512
E-mail: shareholder.services@capitaregistrars.com
Website: www.capitaregistrars.com 

*  Calls cost 10p per minute plus network extras; lines are open 8.30am to 5.30pm, 

Monday to Friday.

E-communications
To register to receive shareholder communications from the company 
electronically, visit www.greeneking-shares.com and either log in 
or click on ‘register new user’ and follow the instructions.

By registering your e-mail address you will receive e-mails with a 
web link to information posted on the company’s website, including 
the report and accounts, notice of meetings and other information 
communicated to shareholders.

Indirect investors’ information rights
Beneficial owners of shares held on their behalf by a different 
registered holder now have certain information rights regarding 
Greene King. They have the right to ask their registered holder 
to nominate them to receive all non-personalised information 
distributed to shareholders, in accordance with the provisions 
of section 146 of the Companies Act 2006. 

Should you wish to be nominated to receive information from 
Greene King directly, please contact your registered holder, who 
will need to notify our registrars, Capita Registrars, accordingly. 
Please note that, once nominated, beneficial owners of shares must 
continue to direct all communications regarding those shares to the 
registered holder of those shares rather than to the registrars 
or to Greene King directly. 

Share dealing services
Stocktrade 
Telephone: 0845 601 0995 

Redmayne Bentley
Moseley’s Farm Offices
Fornham All Saints
Bury St Edmunds
Suffolk IP28 6JY
Telephone: 01284 723 761

Capita Share Dealing Services
Telephone: 0871 664 0454*
Website: www.capitadeal.com

*  Calls cost 10p per minute plus network extras; lines are open 8.00am to 4.30pm, 

Monday to Friday.

Killik & Co
Telephone: 020 7337 0716
Email: nominee@killik.com

Capital gains tax
For the purpose of computing capital gains tax, the market 
value of the ordinary shares on 31 March 1982, after adjustment for 
the capitalisation issues in 1980 and 1982 was 72.5625p. After take-up 
of the rights issue in July 1996, the March 1982 value becomes 129.6875p. 
With the take-up of the rights issue in May 2009, the March 1982 
value becomes 182.3046875p.

Unsolicited calls
Please note that we will never contact our shareholders by telephone. 
If you receive an unsolicited call from anyone purporting to be from 
or calling on behalf of Greene King, please do not disclose any of your 
personal details to the caller. You can find out more information about 
investment scams, how to protect yourself and report any suspicious 
telephone calls from the Financial Conduct Authority (“FCA”) 
by visiting their website (www.fca.org.uk) or contacting them on 
0800 111 6768. The FCA advise that if it sounds too good to be true, 
it probably is.

www.greeneking.co.uk

Annual report 2013 GREENE KING PLC

103

FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
Corporate advisers

Financial advisers
Lazard & Co. Limited
50 Stratton Street
London W1J 8LL

Joint stockbrokers
Deutsche Bank AG London
Winchester House
1 Great Winchester Street
London EC2N 3EQ

Citigroup Global Markets Limited
Citigroup Centre
33 Canada Square
Canary Wharf
London E14 5LB

Auditors
Ernst & Young LLP
1 More London Place
London SE1 2AF

Solicitors
Linklaters 
One Silk Street
London EC2Y 8HQ

104

GREENE KING PLC Annual report 2013

www.greeneking.co.uk

Elemental Chlorine Free

Greene King’s commitment to environmental issues is reflected in this 
annual report which has been printed on Revive 100 Silk, a recycled paper 
containing 100% post-consumer waste. This document was printed by 
, their environmental print technology, 
Pureprint Group using 
which minimises the impact of printing on the environment. Vegetable 
based inks have been used and 99% of dry waste is diverted from landfill. 
The printer is a CarbonNeutral® company. Both the printer and the 
paper mill are registered to ISO 14001.

 
G

r

e

e

n

e

K

i

n

g

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

A

l

r

e

p

o

r

t

2

0

1

3

Greene King plc
Registered in England No. 24511

Registered Office 
Westgate Brewery 
Bury St Edmunds 
Suffolk 
IP33 1QT

Telephone: 01284 763222 
www.greeneking.co.uk

 
 
 
 
 
G
r
e
e
n
e
K
i
n
g
p
l
c

A
n
n
u
A
l

r
e
p
o
r
t

2
0
1
3